Math::libPARI(3pm) - phpMan

Command: man perldoc info search(apropos)  


libPARI(3pm)                   User Contributed Perl Documentation                   libPARI(3pm)



NAME
       libPARI - Functions and Operations Available in PARI and GP

DESCRIPTION
       The functions and operators available in PARI and in the GP/PARI calculator are numerous
       and everexpanding. Here is a description of the ones available in version 2.2.0. It should
       be noted that many of these functions accept quite different types as arguments, but
       others are more restricted. The list of acceptable types will be given for each function
       or class of functions.  Except when stated otherwise, it is understood that a function or
       operation which should make natural sense is legal. In this chapter, we will describe the
       functions according to a rough classification. The general entry looks something like:

       foo"(x,{flag = 0})": short description.

       The library syntax is foo"(x,flag)".

       This means that the GP function "foo" has one mandatory argument "x", and an optional one,
       "flag", whose default value is 0 (the "{}" should never be typed, it is just a convenient
       notation we will use throughout to denote optional arguments). That is, you can type
       "foo(x,2)", or foo(x), which is then understood to mean "foo(x,0)". As well, a comma or
       closing parenthesis, where an optional argument should have been, signals to GP it should
       use the default. Thus, the syntax "foo(x,)" is also accepted as a synonym for our last
       expression. When a function has more than one optional argument, the argument list is
       filled with user supplied values, in order.  And when none are left, the defaults are used
       instead. Thus, assuming that "foo"'s prototype had been

         " foo({x = 1},{y = 2},{z = 3}), "

       typing in "foo(6,4)" would give you "foo(6,4,3)". In the rare case when you want to set
       some far away flag, and leave the defaults in between as they stand, you can use the
       ``empty arg'' trick alluded to above: "foo(6,,1)" would yield "foo(6,2,1)". By the way,
       "foo()" by itself yields "foo(1,2,3)" as was to be expected. In this rather special case
       of a function having no mandatory argument, you can even omit the "()": a standalone "foo"
       would be enough (though we don't really recommend it for your scripts, for the sake of
       clarity). In defining GP syntax, we strove to put optional arguments at the end of the
       argument list (of course, since they would not make sense otherwise), and in order of
       decreasing usefulness so that, most of the time, you will be able to ignore them.

       Binary Flags. For some of these optional flags, we adopted the customary binary notation
       as a compact way to represent many toggles with just one number. Letting "(p_0,...,p_n)"
       be a list of switches (i.e. of properties which can be assumed to take either the value 0
       or 1), the number "2^3 + 2^5 = 40" means that "p_3" and "p_5" have been set (that is, set
       to 1), and none of the others were (that is, they were set to 0). This will usually be
       announced as ``The binary digits of "flag" mean 1: "p_0", 2: "p_1", 4: "p_2"'', and so on,
       using the available consecutive powers of 2.

       Pointers. If a parameter in the function prototype is prefixed with a & sign, as in

       foo"(x,&e)"

       it means that, besides the normal return value, the variable named "e" may be set as a
       side effect. When passing the argument, the & sign has to be typed in explicitly. As of
       version 2.2.0, this "pointer" argument is optional for all documented functions, hence the
       & will always appear between brackets as in "issquare""(x,{&e})".

       About library programming. To finish with our generic simple-minded example, the library
       function "foo", as defined above, is seen to have two mandatory arguments, "x" and flag
       (no PARI mathematical function has been implemented so as to accept a variable number of
       arguments). When not mentioned otherwise, the result and arguments of a function are
       assumed implicitly to be of type "GEN".  Most other functions return an object of type
       "long" integer in C (see Chapter 4). The variable or parameter names prec and flag always
       denote "long" integers.

       The "entree" type is used by the library to implement iterators (loops, sums, integrals,
       etc.) when a formal variable has to successively assume a number of values in a given set.
       When programming with the library, it is easier and much more efficient to code loops and
       the like directly. Hence this type is not documented, although it does appear in a few
       library function prototypes below. See "Label se:sums" for more details.

Standard monadic or dyadic operators
   +"/"-
       The expressions "+""x" and "-""x" refer to monadic operators (the first does nothing, the
       second negates "x").

       The library syntax is gneg"(x)" for "-""x".

   +, "-"
       The expression "x" "+" "y" is the sum and "x" "-" "y" is the difference of "x" and "y".
       Among the prominent impossibilities are addition/subtraction between a scalar type and a
       vector or a matrix, between vector/matrices of incompatible sizes and between an
       integermod and a real number.

       The library syntax is gadd"(x,y)" "x" "+" "y", "gsub(x,y)" for "x" "-" "y".

   *
       The expression "x" "*" "y" is the product of "x" and "y". Among the prominent
       impossibilities are multiplication between vector/matrices of incompatible sizes, between
       an integermod and a real number. Note that because of vector and matrix operations, "*" is
       not necessarily commutative. Note also that since multiplication between two column or two
       row vectors is not allowed, to obtain the scalar product of two vectors of the same
       length, you must multiply a line vector by a column vector, if necessary by transposing
       one of the vectors (using the operator "~" or the function "mattranspose", see "Label
       se:linear_algebra").

       If "x" and "y" are binary quadratic forms, compose them. See also "qfbnucomp" and
       "qfbnupow".

       The library syntax is gmul"(x,y)" for "x" "*" "y". Also available is "gsqr(x)" for "x" "*"
       "x" (faster of course!).

   /
       The expression "x" "/" "y" is the quotient of "x" and "y". In addition to the
       impossibilities for multiplication, note that if the divisor is a matrix, it must be an
       invertible square matrix, and in that case the result is "x*y^{-1}". Furthermore note that
       the result is as exact as possible: in particular, division of two integers always gives a
       rational number (which may be an integer if the quotient is exact) and not the Euclidean
       quotient (see "x" "\" "y" for that), and similarly the quotient of two polynomials is a
       rational function in general. To obtain the approximate real value of the quotient of two
       integers, add 0. to the result; to obtain the approximate "p"-adic value of the quotient
       of two integers, add "O(p^k)" to the result; finally, to obtain the Taylor series
       expansion of the quotient of two polynomials, add "O(X^k)" to the result or use the
       "taylor" function (see "Label se:taylor").

       The library syntax is gdiv"(x,y)" for "x" "/" "y".

   \
       The expression "x" "\" "y" is the

       Euclidean quotient of "x" and "y". The types must be either both integer or both
       polynomials. The result is the Euclidean quotient. In the case of integer division, the
       quotient is such that the corresponding remainder is non-negative.

       The library syntax is gdivent"(x,y)" for "x" "\" "y".

   \/
       The expression "x" "\/" "y" is the Euclidean quotient of "x" and "y".  The types must be
       either both integer or both polynomials. The result is the rounded Euclidean quotient. In
       the case of integer division, the quotient is such that the corresponding remainder is
       smallest in absolute value and in case of a tie the quotient closest to "+ oo " is chosen.

       The library syntax is gdivround"(x,y)" for "x" "\/" "y".

   %
       The expression "x" "%" "y" is the

       Euclidean remainder of "x" and "y". The modulus "y" must be of type integer or polynomial.
       The result is the remainder, always non-negative in the case of integers. Allowed dividend
       types are scalar exact types when the modulus is an integer, and polynomials, polmods and
       rational functions when the modulus is a polynomial.

       The library syntax is gmod"(x,y)" for "x" "%" "y".

   divrem"(x,y)"
       creates a column vector with two components, the first being the Euclidean quotient, the
       second the Euclidean remainder, of the division of "x" by "y". This avoids the need to do
       two divisions if one needs both the quotient and the remainder. The arguments must be both
       integers or both polynomials; in the case of integers, the remainder is non-negative.

       The library syntax is gdiventres"(x,y)".

   ^
       The expression "x^n" is powering.  If the exponent is an integer, then exact operations
       are performed using binary (left-shift) powering techniques. In particular, in this case
       "x" cannot be a vector or matrix unless it is a square matrix (and moreover invertible if
       the exponent is negative). If "x" is a "p"-adic number, its precision will increase if
       "v_p(n) > 0". PARI is able to rewrite the multiplication "x * x" of two identical objects
       as "x^2", or sqr(x) (here, identical means the operands are two different labels
       referencing the same chunk of memory; no equality test is performed). This is no longer
       true when more than two arguments are involved.

       If the exponent is not of type integer, this is treated as a transcendental function (see
       "Label se:trans"), and in particular has the effect of componentwise powering on vector or
       matrices.

       As an exception, if the exponent is a rational number "p/q" and "x" an integer modulo a
       prime, return a solution "y" of "y^q = x^p" if it exists. Currently, "q" must not have
       large prime factors.

       Beware that

         ? Mod(7,19)^(1/2)
         %1 = Mod(11, 19)/*is any square root*/
         ? sqrt(Mod(7,19))
         %2 = Mod(8, 19)/*is the smallest square root*/
         ? Mod(7,19)^(3/5)
         %3 = Mod(1, 19)
         ? %3^(5/3)
         %4 = Mod(1, 19)/*Mod(7,19) is just another cubic root*/

       The library syntax is gpow"(x,n,prec)" for "x^n".

   shift"(x,n)" or "x" "<< " "n" ( = "x" ">> " "(-n)")
       shifts "x" componentwise left by "n" bits if "n >= 0" and right by "|n|" bits if "n < 0".
       A left shift by "n" corresponds to multiplication by "2^n". A right shift of an integer
       "x" by "|n|" corresponds to a Euclidean division of "x" by "2^{|n|}" with a remainder of
       the same sign as "x", hence is not the same (in general) as "x \ 2^n".

       The library syntax is gshift"(x,n)" where "n" is a "long".

   shiftmul"(x,n)"
       multiplies "x" by "2^n". The difference with "shift" is that when "n < 0", ordinary
       division takes place, hence for example if "x" is an integer the result may be a fraction,
       while for "shift" Euclidean division takes place when "n < 0" hence if "x" is an integer
       the result is still an integer.

       The library syntax is gmul2n"(x,n)" where "n" is a "long".

   Comparison and boolean operators
       The six standard comparison operators "<= ", "< ", ">= ", "> ", " == ", "! = " are
       available in GP, and in library mode under the names gle, glt, gge, ggt, geq, gne
       respectively. The library syntax is "co(x,y)", where co is the comparison operator. The
       result is 1 (as a "GEN") if the comparison is true, 0 (as a "GEN") if it is false.

       The standard boolean functions  "||" (inclusive or), "&&" (and) and "!" (not) are also
       available, and the library syntax is "gor(x,y)", "gand(x,y)" and "gnot(x)" respectively.

       In library mode, it is in fact usually preferable to use the two basic functions which are
       "gcmp(x,y)" which gives the sign (1, 0, or -1) of "x-y", where "x" and "y" must be in R,
       and "gegal(x,y)" which can be applied to any two PARI objects "x" and "y" and gives 1
       (i.e. true) if they are equal (but not necessarily identical), 0 (i.e. false) otherwise.
       Particular cases of gegal which should be used are "gcmp0(x)" ("x == 0" ?), "gcmp1(x)" ("x
       == 1" ?), and "gcmp_1(x)" ("x == -1" ?).

       Note that "gcmp0(x)" tests whether "x" is equal to zero, even if "x" is not an exact
       object. To test whether "x" is an exact object which is equal to zero, one must use
       "isexactzero".

       Also note that the "gcmp" and "gegal" functions return a C-integer, and not a "GEN" like
       "gle" etc.

       GP accepts the following synonyms for some of the above functions: since we thought it
       might easily lead to confusion, we don't use the customary C operators for bitwise "and"
       or bitwise "or" (use "bitand" or "bitor"), hence "|" and "&" are accepted as synonyms of
       "||" and "&&" respectively.  Also, "<  > " is accepted as a synonym for "! = ". On the
       other hand, " = " is definitely not a synonym for " == " since it is the assignment
       statement.  and bitwise or"

   lex"(x,y)"
       gives the result of a lexicographic comparison between "x" and "y". This is to be
       interpreted in quite a wide sense. For example, the vector "[1,3]" will be considered
       smaller than the longer vector "[1,3,-1]" (but of course larger than "[1,2,5]"),
       i.e. "lex([1,3], [1,3,-1])" will return "-1".

       The library syntax is lexcmp"(x,y)".

   sign"(x)"
       sign (0, 1 or "-1") of "x", which must be of type integer, real or fraction.

       The library syntax is gsigne"(x)". The result is a "long".

   max"(x,y)" and min"(x,y)"
       creates the maximum and minimum of "x" and "y" when they can be compared.

       The library syntax is gmax"(x,y)" and "gmin(x,y)".

   vecmax"(x)"
       if "x" is a vector or a matrix, returns the maximum of the elements of "x", otherwise
       returns a copy of "x". Returns "- oo " in the form of "-(2^{31}-1)" (or "-(2^{63}-1)" for
       64-bit machines) if "x" is empty.

       The library syntax is vecmax"(x)".

   vecmin"(x)"
       if "x" is a vector or a matrix, returns the minimum of the elements of "x", otherwise
       returns a copy of "x". Returns "+ oo " in the form of "2^{31}-1" (or "2^{63}-1" for 64-bit
       machines) if "x" is empty.

       The library syntax is vecmin"(x)".

Conversions and similar elementary functions or commands
       Many of the conversion functions are rounding or truncating operations. In this case, if
       the argument is a rational function, the result is the Euclidean quotient of the numerator
       by the denominator, and if the argument is a vector or a matrix, the operation is done
       componentwise. This will not be restated for every function.

   List"({x = []})"
       transforms a (row or column) vector "x" into a list. The only other way to create a
       "t_LIST" is to use the function "listcreate".

       This is useless in library mode.

   Mat"({x = []})"
       transforms the object "x" into a matrix.  If "x" is not a vector or a matrix, this creates
       a "1 x 1" matrix.  If "x" is a row (resp. column) vector, this creates a 1-row (resp.
       1-column) matrix. If "x" is already a matrix, a copy of "x" is created.

       This function can be useful in connection with the function "concat" (see there).

       The library syntax is gtomat"(x)".

   Mod"(x,y,{flag = 0})"
        creates the PARI object "(x mod y)", i.e. an integermod or a polmod. "y" must be an
       integer or a polynomial. If "y" is an integer, "x" must be an integer, a rational number,
       or a "p"-adic number compatible with the modulus "y". If "y" is a polynomial, "x" must be
       a scalar (which is not a polmod), a polynomial, a rational function, or a power series.

       This function is not the same as "x" "%" "y", the result of which is an integer or a
       polynomial.

       If "flag" is equal to 1, the modulus of the created result is put on the heap and not on
       the stack, and hence becomes a permanent copy which cannot be erased later by garbage
       collecting (see "Label se:garbage"). Functions will operate faster on such objects and
       memory consumption will be lower.  On the other hand, care should be taken to avoid
       creating too many such objects.

       Under GP, the same effect can be obtained by assigning the object to a GP variable (the
       value of which is a permanent object for the duration of the relevant library function
       call, and is treated as such). This value is subject to garbage collection, since it will
       be deleted when the value changes. This is preferable and the above flag is only retained
       for compatibility reasons (it can still be useful in library mode).

       The library syntax is Mod0"(x,y,flag)". Also available are

       "*" for "flag = 1": "gmodulo(x,y)".

       "*" for "flag = 0": "gmodulcp(x,y)".

   Pol"(x,{v = x})"
       transforms the object "x" into a polynomial with main variable "v". If "x" is a scalar,
       this gives a constant polynomial. If "x" is a power series, the effect is identical to
       "truncate" (see there), i.e. it chops off the "O(X^k)". If "x" is a vector, this function
       creates the polynomial whose coefficients are given in "x", with "x[1]" being the leading
       coefficient (which can be zero).

       Warning: this is not a substitution function. It is intended to be quick and dirty. So if
       you try "Pol(a,y)" on the polynomial "a = x+y", you will get "y+y", which is not a valid
       PARI object.

       The library syntax is gtopoly"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

   Polrev"(x,{v = x})"
       transform the object "x" into a polynomial with main variable "v". If "x" is a scalar,
       this gives a constant polynomial.  If "x" is a power series, the effect is identical to
       "truncate" (see there), i.e. it chops off the "O(X^k)". If "x" is a vector, this function
       creates the polynomial whose coefficients are given in "x", with "x[1]" being the constant
       term. Note that this is the reverse of "Pol" if "x" is a vector, otherwise it is identical
       to "Pol".

       The library syntax is gtopolyrev"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

   Qfb"(a,b,c,{D = 0.})"
       creates the binary quadratic form "ax^2+bxy+cy^2". If "b^2-4ac > 0", initialize Shanks'
       distance function to "D".

       The library syntax is Qfb0"(a,b,c,D,prec)". Also available are "qfi(a,b,c)" (when "b^2-4ac
       < 0"), and "qfr(a,b,c,d)" (when "b^2-4ac > 0").

   Ser"(x,{v = x})"
       transforms the object "x" into a power series with main variable "v" ("x" by default). If
       "x" is a scalar, this gives a constant power series with precision given by the default
       "serieslength" (corresponding to the C global variable "precdl"). If "x" is a polynomial,
       the precision is the greatest of "precdl" and the degree of the polynomial. If "x" is a
       vector, the precision is similarly given, and the coefficients of the vector are
       understood to be the coefficients of the power series starting from the constant term
       (i.e. the reverse of the function "Pol").

       The warning given for "Pol" applies here: this is not a substitution function.

       The library syntax is gtoser"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable number (i.e. a C integer).

   Set"({x = []})"
       converts "x" into a set, i.e. into a row vector with strictly increasing entries. "x" can
       be of any type, but is most useful when "x" is already a vector. The components of "x" are
       put in canonical form (type "t_STR") so as to be easily sorted. To recover an ordinary
       "GEN" from such an element, you can apply "eval" to it.

       The library syntax is gtoset"(x)".

   Str"({x = ""},{flag = 0})"
       converts "x" into a character string (type "t_STR", the empty string if "x" is omitted).
       To recover an ordinary "GEN" from a string, apply "eval" to it. The arguments of "Str" are
       evaluated in string context (see "Label se:strings"). If flag is set, treat "x" as a
       filename and perform environment expansion on the string. This feature can be used to read
       environment variable values.

         ? i = 1; Str("x" i)
         %1 = "x1"
         ? eval(%)
         %2 = x1;
         ? Str("$HOME", 1)
         %3 = "/home/pari"

       The library syntax is strtoGENstr"(x,flag)". This function is mostly useless in library
       mode. Use the pair "strtoGEN"/"GENtostr" to convert between "char*" and "GEN".

   Vec"({x = []})"
       transforms the object "x" into a row vector. The vector will be with one component only,
       except when "x" is a vector/matrix or a quadratic form (in which case the resulting vector
       is simply the initial object considered as a row vector), but more importantly when "x" is
       a polynomial or a power series. In the case of a polynomial, the coefficients of the
       vector start with the leading coefficient of the polynomial, while for power series only
       the significant coefficients are taken into account, but this time by increasing order of
       degree.

       The library syntax is gtovec"(x)".

   binary"(x)"
       outputs the vector of the binary digits of "|x|".  Here "x" can be an integer, a real
       number (in which case the result has two components, one for the integer part, one for the
       fractional part) or a vector/matrix.

       The library syntax is binaire"(x)".

   bitand"(x,y)"
       bitwise "and" of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer

         "sum (x_i and y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitand"(x,y)".

   bitneg"(x,{n = -1})"
       bitwise negation of an integer "x", truncated to "n" bits, that is the integer

         "sum_{i = 0}^n not(x_i) 2^i"

       The special case "n = -1" means no truncation: an infinite sequence of leading 1 is then
       represented as a negative number.

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitneg"(x)".

   bitnegimply"(x,y)"
       bitwise negated imply of two integers "x" and "y" (or "not" "(x ==> y)"), that is the
       integer

         "sum (x_i and not(y_i)) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitnegimply"(x,y)".

   bitor"(x,y)"
       bitwise (inclusive) "or" of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer inclusive or"

         "sum (x_i or y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitor"(x,y)".

   bittest"(x,n)"
       outputs the "n^{th}" bit of "|x|" starting from the right (i.e. the coefficient of "2^n"
       in the binary expansion of "x").  The result is 0 or 1. To extract several bits at once as
       a vector, pass a vector for "n".

       The library syntax is bittest"(x,n)", where "n" and the result are "long"s.

   bitxor"(x,y)"
       bitwise (exclusive) "or" of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer exclusive or"

         "sum (x_i xor y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitxor"(x,y)".

   ceil"(x)"
       ceiling of "x". When "x" is in R, the result is the smallest integer greater than or equal
       to "x". Applied to a rational function, ceil(x) returns the euclidian quotient of the
       numerator by the denominator.

       The library syntax is gceil"(x)".

   centerlift"(x,{v})"
       lifts an element "x = a mod n" of "Z/nZ" to "a" in Z, and similarly lifts a polmod to a
       polynomial. This is the same as "lift" except that in the particular case of elements of
       "Z/nZ", the lift "y" is such that "-n/2 < y <= n/2". If "x" is of type fraction, complex,
       quadratic, polynomial, power series, rational function, vector or matrix, the lift is done
       for each coefficient. Real and "p"-adics are forbidden.

       The library syntax is centerlift0"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted "v" is
       coded as "-1". Also available is centerlift"(x)" = "centerlift0(x,-1)".

   changevar"(x,y)"
       creates a copy of the object "x" where its variables are modified according to the
       permutation specified by the vector "y". For example, assume that the variables have been
       introduced in the order "x", "a", "b", "c". Then, if "y" is the vector "[x,c,a,b]", the
       variable "a" will be replaced by "c", "b" by "a", and "c" by "b", "x" being unchanged.
       Note that the permutation must be completely specified, e.g. "[c,a,b]" would not work,
       since this would replace "x" by "c", and leave "a" and "b" unchanged (as well as "c" which
       is the fourth variable of the initial list). In particular, the new variable names must be
       distinct.

       The library syntax is changevar"(x,y)".

   components of a PARI object
       There are essentially three ways to extract the components from a PARI object.

       The first and most general, is the function "component(x,n)" which extracts the
       "n^{th}"-component of "x". This is to be understood as follows: every PARI type has one or
       two initial code words. The components are counted, starting at 1, after these code words.
       In particular if "x" is a vector, this is indeed the "n^{th}"-component of "x", if "x" is
       a matrix, the "n^{th}" column, if "x" is a polynomial, the "n^{th}" coefficient (i.e. of
       degree "n-1"), and for power series, the "n^{th}" significant coefficient. The use of the
       function "component" implies the knowledge of the structure of the different PARI types,
       which can be recalled by typing "\t" under GP.

       The library syntax is compo"(x,n)", where "n" is a "long".

       The two other methods are more natural but more restricted. The function " polcoeff(x,n)"
       gives the coefficient of degree "n" of the polynomial or power series "x", with respect to
       the main variable of "x" (to check variable ordering, or to change it, use the function
       "reorder", see "Label se:reorder"). In particular if "n" is less than the valuation of "x"
       or in the case of a polynomial, greater than the degree, the result is zero (contrary to
       "compo" which would send an error message). If "x" is a power series and "n" is greater
       than the largest significant degree, then an error message is issued.

       For greater flexibility, vector or matrix types are also accepted for "x", and the meaning
       is then identical with that of "compo".

       Finally note that a scalar type is considered by "polcoeff" as a polynomial of degree
       zero.

       The library syntax is truecoeff"(x,n)".

       The third method is specific to vectors or matrices under GP. If "x" is a (row or column)
       vector, then "x[n]" represents the "n^{th}" component of "x", i.e. "compo(x,n)". It is
       more natural and shorter to write. If "x" is a matrix, "x[m,n]" represents the coefficient
       of row "m" and column "n" of the matrix, "x[m,]" represents the "m^{th}" row of "x", and
       "x[,n]" represents the "n^{th}" column of "x".

       Finally note that in library mode, the macros coeff and mael are available to deal with
       the non-recursivity of the "GEN" type from the compiler's point of view. See the
       discussion on typecasts in Chapter 4.

   conj"(x)"
       conjugate of "x". The meaning of this is clear, except that for real quadratic numbers, it
       means conjugation in the real quadratic field. This function has no effect on integers,
       reals, integermods, fractions or "p"-adics. The only forbidden type is polmod (see
       "conjvec" for this).

       The library syntax is gconj"(x)".

   conjvec"(x)"
       conjugate vector representation of "x". If "x" is a polmod, equal to "Mod""(a,q)", this
       gives a vector of length degree(q) containing the complex embeddings of the polmod if "q"
       has integral or rational coefficients, and the conjugates of the polmod if "q" has some
       integermod coefficients. The order is the same as that of the "polroots" functions. If "x"
       is an integer or a rational number, the result is "x". If "x" is a (row or column) vector,
       the result is a matrix whose columns are the conjugate vectors of the individual elements
       of "x".

       The library syntax is conjvec"(x,prec)".

   denominator"(x)"
       lowest denominator of "x". The meaning of this is clear when "x" is a rational number or
       function. When "x" is an integer or a polynomial, the result is equal to 1. When "x" is a
       vector or a matrix, the lowest common denominator of the components of "x" is computed.
       All other types are forbidden.

       The library syntax is denom"(x)".

   floor"(x)"
       floor of "x". When "x" is in R, the result is the largest integer smaller than or equal to
       "x". Applied to a rational function, floor(x) returns the euclidian quotient of the
       numerator by the denominator.

       The library syntax is gfloor"(x)".

   frac"(x)"
       fractional part of "x". Identical to "x-floor(x)". If "x" is real, the result is in
       "[0,1[".

       The library syntax is gfrac"(x)".

   imag"(x)"
       imaginary part of "x". When "x" is a quadratic number, this is the coefficient of "omega"
       in the ``canonical'' integral basis "(1,omega)".

       The library syntax is gimag"(x)".

   length"(x)"
       number of non-code words in "x" really used (i.e. the effective length minus 2 for
       integers and polynomials). In particular, the degree of a polynomial is equal to its
       length minus 1. If "x" has type "t_STR", output number of letters.

       The library syntax is glength"(x)" and the result is a C long.

   lift"(x,{v})"
       lifts an element "x = a mod n" of "Z/nZ" to "a" in Z, and similarly lifts a polmod to a
       polynomial if "v" is omitted.  Otherwise, lifts only polmods with main variable "v" (if
       "v" does not occur in "x", lifts only intmods). If "x" is of type fraction, complex,
       quadratic, polynomial, power series, rational function, vector or matrix, the lift is done
       for each coefficient. Forbidden types for "x" are reals and "p"-adics.

       The library syntax is lift0"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted "v" is coded as
       "-1". Also available is lift"(x)" = "lift0(x,-1)".

   norm"(x)"
       algebraic norm of "x", i.e. the product of "x" with its conjugate (no square roots are
       taken), or conjugates for polmods. For vectors and matrices, the norm is taken
       componentwise and hence is not the "L^2"-norm (see "norml2"). Note that the norm of an
       element of R is its square, so as to be compatible with the complex norm.

       The library syntax is gnorm"(x)".

   norml2"(x)"
       square of the "L^2"-norm of "x". "x" must be a (row or column) vector.

       The library syntax is gnorml2"(x)".

   numerator"(x)"
       numerator of "x". When "x" is a rational number or function, the meaning is clear. When
       "x" is an integer or a polynomial, the result is "x" itself. When "x" is a vector or a
       matrix, then numerator(x) is defined to be "denominator(x)*x". All other types are
       forbidden.

       The library syntax is numer"(x)".

   numtoperm"(n,k)"
       generates the "k"-th permutation (as a row vector of length "n") of the numbers 1 to "n".
       The number "k" is taken modulo "n!", i.e. inverse function of "permtonum".

       The library syntax is permute"(n,k)", where "n" is a "long".

   padicprec"(x,p)"
       absolute "p"-adic precision of the object "x".  This is the minimum precision of the
       components of "x". The result is "VERYBIGINT" ("2^{31}-1" for 32-bit machines or
       "2^{63}-1" for 64-bit machines) if "x" is an exact object.

       The library syntax is padicprec"(x,p)" and the result is a "long" integer.

   permtonum"(x)"
       given a permutation "x" on "n" elements, gives the number "k" such that "x =
       numtoperm(n,k)", i.e. inverse function of "numtoperm".

       The library syntax is permuteInv"(x)".

   precision"(x,{n})"
       gives the precision in decimal digits of the PARI object "x". If "x" is an exact object,
       the largest single precision integer is returned. If "n" is not omitted, creates a new
       object equal to "x" with a new precision "n". This is to be understood as follows:

       For exact types, no change. For "x" a vector or a matrix, the operation is done
       componentwise.

       For real "x", "n" is the number of desired significant decimal digits.  If "n" is smaller
       than the precision of "x", "x" is truncated, otherwise "x" is extended with zeros.

       For "x" a "p"-adic or a power series, "n" is the desired number of significant "p"-adic or
       "X"-adic digits, where "X" is the main variable of "x".

       Note that the function "precision" never changes the type of the result.  In particular it
       is not possible to use it to obtain a polynomial from a power series. For that, see
       "truncate".

       The library syntax is precision0"(x,n)", where "n" is a "long". Also available are
       "ggprecision(x)" (result is a "GEN") and "gprec(x,n)", where "n" is a "long".

   random"({N = 2^{31}})"
       gives a random integer between 0 and "N-1". "N" can be arbitrary large. This is an
       internal PARI function and does not depend on the system's random number generator. Note
       that the resulting integer is obtained by means of linear congruences and will not be well
       distributed in arithmetic progressions.

       The library syntax is genrand"(N)".

   real"(x)"
       real part of "x". In the case where "x" is a quadratic number, this is the coefficient of
       1 in the ``canonical'' integral basis "(1,omega)".

       The library syntax is greal"(x)".

   round"(x,{&e})"
       If "x" is in R, rounds "x" to the nearest integer and sets "e" to the number of error
       bits, that is the binary exponent of the difference between the original and the rounded
       value (the ``fractional part''). If the exponent of "x" is too large compared to its
       precision (i.e. "e > 0"), the result is undefined and an error occurs if "e" was not
       given.

       Important remark: note that, contrary to the other truncation functions, this function
       operates on every coefficient at every level of a PARI object. For example

         "truncate((2.4*X^2-1.7)/(X)) = 2.4*X,"

       whereas

         "round((2.4*X^2-1.7)/(X)) = (2*X^2-2)/(X)."

       An important use of "round" is to get exact results after a long approximate computation,
       when theory tells you that the coefficients must be integers.

       The library syntax is grndtoi"(x,&e)", where "e" is a "long" integer. Also available is
       "ground(x)".

   simplify"(x)"
       this function tries to simplify the object "x" as much as it can. The simplifications do
       not concern rational functions (which PARI automatically tries to simplify), but type
       changes. Specifically, a complex or quadratic number whose imaginary part is exactly equal
       to 0 (i.e. not a real zero) is converted to its real part, and a polynomial of degree zero
       is converted to its constant term. For all types, this of course occurs recursively. This
       function is useful in any case, but in particular before the use of arithmetic functions
       which expect integer arguments, and not for example a complex number of 0 imaginary part
       and integer real part (which is however printed as an integer).

       The library syntax is simplify"(x)".

   sizebyte"(x)"
       outputs the total number of bytes occupied by the tree representing the PARI object "x".

       The library syntax is taille2"(x)" which returns a "long". The function taille returns the
       number of words instead.

   sizedigit"(x)"
       outputs a quick bound for the number of decimal digits of (the components of) "x", off by
       at most 1. If you want the exact value, you can use "length(Str(x))", which is much
       slower.

       The library syntax is sizedigit"(x)" which returns a "long".

   truncate"(x,{&e})"
       truncates "x" and sets "e" to the number of error bits. When "x" is in R, this means that
       the part after the decimal point is chopped away, "e" is the binary exponent of the
       difference between the original and the truncated value (the ``fractional part''). If the
       exponent of "x" is too large compared to its precision (i.e. "e > 0"), the result is
       undefined and an error occurs if "e" was not given. The function applies componentwise on
       rational functions and vector / matrices; "e" is then the maximal number of error bits.

       Note a very special use of "truncate": when applied to a power series, it transforms it
       into a polynomial or a rational function with denominator a power of "X", by chopping away
       the "O(X^k)". Similarly, when applied to a "p"-adic number, it transforms it into an
       integer or a rational number by chopping away the "O(p^k)".

       The library syntax is gcvtoi"(x,&e)", where "e" is a "long" integer. Also available is
       gtrunc"(x)".

   valuation"(x,p)"
        computes the highest exponent of "p" dividing "x". If "p" is of type integer, "x" must be
       an integer, an integermod whose modulus is divisible by "p", a fraction, a "q"-adic number
       with "q = p", or a polynomial or power series in which case the valuation is the minimum
       of the valuation of the coefficients.

       If "p" is of type polynomial, "x" must be of type polynomial or rational function, and
       also a power series if "x" is a monomial. Finally, the valuation of a vector, complex or
       quadratic number is the minimum of the component valuations.

       If "x = 0", the result is "VERYBIGINT" ("2^{31}-1" for 32-bit machines or "2^{63}-1" for
       64-bit machines) if "x" is an exact object. If "x" is a "p"-adic numbers or power series,
       the result is the exponent of the zero.  Any other type combinations gives an error.

       The library syntax is ggval"(x,p)", and the result is a "long".

   variable"(x)"
       gives the main variable of the object "x", and "p" if "x" is a "p"-adic number. Gives an
       error if "x" has no variable associated to it. Note that this function is useful only in
       GP, since in library mode the function "gvar" is more appropriate.

       The library syntax is gpolvar"(x)". However, in library mode, this function should not be
       used.  Instead, test whether "x" is a "p"-adic (type "t_PADIC"), in which case "p" is in
       "x[2]", or call the function "gvar(x)" which returns the variable number of "x" if it
       exists, "BIGINT" otherwise.

Transcendental functions
       As a general rule, which of course in some cases may have exceptions, transcendental
       functions operate in the following way:

       "*" If the argument is either an integer, a real, a rational, a complex or a quadratic
       number, it is, if necessary, first converted to a real (or complex) number using the
       current precision held in the default "realprecision". Note that only exact arguments are
       converted, while inexact arguments such as reals are not.

       Under GP this is transparent to the user, but when programming in library mode, care must
       be taken to supply a meaningful parameter prec as the last argument of the function if the
       first argument is an exact object.  This parameter is ignored if the argument is inexact.

       Note that in library mode the precision argument prec is a word count including codewords,
       i.e. represents the length in words of a real number, while under GP the precision (which
       is changed by the metacommand "\p" or using "default(realprecision,...)") is the number of
       significant decimal digits.

       Note that some accuracies attainable on 32-bit machines cannot be attained on 64-bit
       machines for parity reasons. For example the default GP accuracy is 28 decimal digits on
       32-bit machines, corresponding to prec having the value 5, but this cannot be attained on
       64-bit machines.

       After possible conversion, the function is computed. Note that even if the argument is
       real, the result may be complex (e.g. "acos(2.0)" or "acosh(0.0)"). Note also that the
       principal branch is always chosen.

       "*" If the argument is an integermod or a "p"-adic, at present only a few functions like
       "sqrt" (square root), "sqr" (square), "log", "exp", powering, "teichmuller" (Teichmueller
       character) and "agm" (arithmetic-geometric mean) are implemented.

       Note that in the case of a 2-adic number, sqr(x) may not be identical to "x*x": for
       example if "x = 1+O(2^5)" and "y = 1+O(2^5)" then "x*y = 1+O(2^5)" while "sqr(x) =
       1+O(2^6)". Here, "x * x" yields the same result as sqr(x) since the two operands are known
       to be identical. The same statement holds true for "p"-adics raised to the power "n",
       where "v_p(n) > 0".

       Remark: note that if we wanted to be strictly consistent with the PARI philosophy, we
       should have "x*y = (4 mod 8)" and "sqr(x) = (4 mod 32)" when both "x" and "y" are
       congruent to 2 modulo 4.  However, since integermod is an exact object, PARI assumes that
       the modulus must not change, and the result is hence "(0 mod 4)" in both cases. On the
       other hand, "p"-adics are not exact objects, hence are treated differently.

       "*" If the argument is a polynomial, power series or rational function, it is, if
       necessary, first converted to a power series using the current precision held in the
       variable "precdl". Under GP this again is transparent to the user. When programming in
       library mode, however, the global variable "precdl" must be set before calling the
       function if the argument has an exact type (i.e. not a power series). Here "precdl" is not
       an argument of the function, but a global variable.

       Then the Taylor series expansion of the function around "X = 0" (where "X" is the main
       variable) is computed to a number of terms depending on the number of terms of the
       argument and the function being computed.

       "*" If the argument is a vector or a matrix, the result is the componentwise evaluation of
       the function. In particular, transcendental functions on square matrices, which are not
       implemented in the present version 2.2.0 (see Appendix B however), will have a slightly
       different name if they are implemented some day.

   ^
       If "y" is not of type integer, "x^y" has the same effect as "exp(y*ln(x))". It can be
       applied to "p"-adic numbers as well as to the more usual types.

       The library syntax is gpow"(x,y,prec)".

   Euler
       Euler's constant 0.57721.... Note that "Euler" is one of the few special reserved names
       which cannot be used for variables (the others are "I" and "Pi", as well as all function
       names).

       The library syntax is mpeuler"(prec)" where "prec" must be given. Note that this creates
       "gamma" on the PARI stack, but a copy is also created on the heap for quicker computations
       next time the function is called.

   I
       the complex number " sqrt {-1}".

       The library syntax is the global variable "gi" (of type "GEN").

   Pi
       the constant "Pi" (3.14159...).

       The library syntax is mppi"(prec)" where "prec" must be given. Note that this creates "Pi"
       on the PARI stack, but a copy is also created on the heap for quicker computations next
       time the function is called.

   abs"(x)"
       absolute value of "x" (modulus if "x" is complex).  Power series and rational functions
       are not allowed. Contrary to most transcendental functions, an exact argument is not
       converted to a real number before applying "abs" and an exact result is returned if
       possible.

         ? abs(-1)
         %1 = 1
         ? abs(3/7 + 4/7*I)
         %2 = 5/7
         ? abs(1 + I)
         %3 = 1.414213562373095048801688724

       If "x" is a polynomial, returns "-x" if the leading coefficient is real and negative else
       returns "x". For a power series, the constant coefficient is considered instead.

       The library syntax is gabs"(x,prec)".

   acos"(x)"
       principal branch of "cos^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(acos(x)) belongs to [0,Pi]". If "x
       belongs to R" and "|x| > 1", then acos(x) is complex.

       The library syntax is gacos"(x,prec)".

   acosh"(x)"
       principal branch of "cosh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(acosh(x)) belongs to [0,Pi]". If "x
       belongs to R" and "x < 1", then acosh(x) is complex.

       The library syntax is gach"(x,prec)".

   agm"(x,y)"
       arithmetic-geometric mean of "x" and "y". In the case of complex or negative numbers, the
       principal square root is always chosen. "p"-adic or power series arguments are also
       allowed. Note that a "p"-adic agm exists only if "x/y" is congruent to 1 modulo "p"
       (modulo 16 for "p = 2"). "x" and "y" cannot both be vectors or matrices.

       The library syntax is agm"(x,y,prec)".

   arg"(x)"
       argument of the complex number "x", such that "-Pi < arg(x) <= Pi".

       The library syntax is garg"(x,prec)".

   asin"(x)"
       principal branch of "sin^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(asin(x)) belongs to [-Pi/2,Pi/2]".
       If "x belongs to R" and "|x| > 1" then asin(x) is complex.

       The library syntax is gasin"(x,prec)".

   asinh"(x)"
       principal branch of "sinh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(asinh(x)) belongs to [-Pi/2,Pi/2]".

       The library syntax is gash"(x,prec)".

   atan"(x)"
       principal branch of "tan^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(atan(x)) belongs to  ]-Pi/2,Pi/2[".

       The library syntax is gatan"(x,prec)".

   atanh"(x)"
       principal branch of "tanh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(atanh(x)) belongs to
       ]-Pi/2,Pi/2]". If "x belongs to R" and "|x| > 1" then atanh(x) is complex.

       The library syntax is gath"(x,prec)".

   bernfrac"(x)"
       Bernoulli number "B_x", where "B_0 = 1", "B_1 = -1/2", "B_2 = 1/6",..., expressed as a
       rational number.  The argument "x" should be of type integer.

       The library syntax is bernfrac"(x)".

   bernreal"(x)"
       Bernoulli number "B_x", as "bernfrac", but "B_x" is returned as a real number (with the
       current precision).

       The library syntax is bernreal"(x,prec)".

   bernvec"(x)"
       creates a vector containing, as rational numbers, the Bernoulli numbers "B_0", "B_2",...,
       "B_{2x}". These Bernoulli numbers can then be used as follows. Assume that this vector has
       been put into a variable, say "bernint". Then you can define under GP:

         bern(x) =
         {
           if (x == 1, return(-1/2));
           if (x < 0 || x % 2, return(0));
           bernint[x/2+1]
         }

       and then bern(k) gives the Bernoulli number of index "k" as a rational number, exactly as
       bernreal(k) gives it as a real number. If you need only a few values, calling bernfrac(k)
       each time will be much more efficient than computing the huge vector above.

       The library syntax is bernvec"(x)".

   besseljh"(n,x)"
       "J"-Bessel function of half integral index.  More precisely, "besseljh(n,x)" computes
       "J_{n+1/2}(x)" where "n" must be of type integer, and "x" is any element of C. In the
       present version 2.2.0, this function is not very accurate when "x" is small.

       The library syntax is jbesselh"(n,x,prec)".

   besselk"(nu,x,{flag = 0})"
       "K"-Bessel function of index nu (which can be complex) and argument "x". Only real and
       positive arguments "x" are allowed in the present version 2.2.0. If "flag" is equal to 1,
       uses another implementation of this function which is often faster.

       The library syntax is kbessel"(nu,x,prec)" and "kbessel2(nu,x,prec)" respectively.

   cos"(x)"
       cosine of "x".

       The library syntax is gcos"(x,prec)".

   cosh"(x)"
       hyperbolic cosine of "x".

       The library syntax is gch"(x,prec)".

   cotan"(x)"
       cotangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gcotan"(x,prec)".

   dilog"(x)"
       principal branch of the dilogarithm of "x", i.e. analytic continuation of the power series
       " log _2(x) = sum_{n >= 1}x^n/n^2".

       The library syntax is dilog"(x,prec)".

   eint1"(x,{n})"
       exponential integral "int_x^ oo (e^{-t})/(t)dt" ("x belongs to R")

       If "n" is present, outputs the "n"-dimensional vector "[eint1(x),...,eint1(nx)]" ("x >=
       0"). This is faster than repeatedly calling "eint1(i * x)".

       The library syntax is veceint1"(x,n,prec)". Also available is "eint1(x,prec)".

   erfc"(x)"
       complementary error function "(2/ sqrt Pi)int_x^ oo e^{-t^2}dt".

       The library syntax is erfc"(x,prec)".

   eta"(x,{flag = 0})"
       Dedekind's "eta" function, without the "q^{1/24}". This means the following: if "x" is a
       complex number with positive imaginary part, the result is "prod_{n = 1}^ oo (1-q^n)",
       where "q = e^{2iPi x}". If "x" is a power series (or can be converted to a power series)
       with positive valuation, the result is "prod_{n = 1}^ oo (1-x^n)".

       If "flag = 1" and "x" can be converted to a complex number (i.e. is not a power series),
       computes the true "eta" function, including the leading "q^{1/24}".

       The library syntax is eta"(x,prec)".

   exp"(x)"
       exponential of "x".  "p"-adic arguments with positive valuation are accepted.

       The library syntax is gexp"(x,prec)".

   gammah"(x)"
       gamma function evaluated at the argument "x+1/2". When "x" is an integer, this is much
       faster than using "gamma(x+1/2)".

       The library syntax is ggamd"(x,prec)".

   gamma"(x)"
       gamma function of "x". In the present version 2.2.0 the "p"-adic gamma function is not
       implemented.

       The library syntax is ggamma"(x,prec)".

   hyperu"(a,b,x)"
       "U"-confluent hypergeometric function with parameters "a" and "b". The parameters "a" and
       "b" can be complex but the present implementation requires "x" to be positive.

       The library syntax is hyperu"(a,b,x,prec)".

   incgam"(s,x,{y})"
       incomplete gamma function.

       "x" must be positive and "s" real. The result returned is "int_x^ oo e^{-t}t^{s-1}dt".
       When "y" is given, assume (of course without checking!)  that "y = Gamma(s)". For small
       "x", this will tremendously speed up the computation.

       The library syntax is incgam"(s,x,prec)" and "incgam4(s,x,y,prec)", respectively. There
       exist also the functions incgam1 and incgam2 which are used for internal purposes.

   incgamc"(s,x)"
       complementary incomplete gamma function.

       The arguments "s" and "x" must be positive. The result returned is "int_0^x
       e^{-t}t^{s-1}dt", when "x" is not too large.

       The library syntax is incgam3"(s,x,prec)".

   log"(x,{flag = 0})"
       principal branch of the natural logarithm of "x", i.e. such that "Im(ln(x)) belongs to
       ]-Pi,Pi]". The result is complex (with imaginary part equal to "Pi") if "x belongs to R"
       and "x < 0".

       "p"-adic arguments are also accepted for "x", with the convention that " ln (p) = 0".
       Hence in particular " exp ( ln (x))/x" will not in general be equal to 1 but to a
       "(p-1)"-th root of unity (or "+-1" if "p = 2") times a power of "p".

       If "flag" is equal to 1, use an agm formula suggested by Mestre, when "x" is real,
       otherwise identical to "log".

       The library syntax is glog"(x,prec)" or "glogagm(x,prec)".

   lngamma"(x)"
       principal branch of the logarithm of the gamma function of "x". Can have much larger
       arguments than "gamma" itself.  In the present version 2.2.0, the "p"-adic "lngamma"
       function is not implemented.

       The library syntax is glngamma"(x,prec)".

   polylog"(m,x,{flag = 0})"
       one of the different polylogarithms, depending on flag:

       If "flag = 0" or is omitted: "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", i.e. analytic continuation of
       the power series "Li_m(x) = sum_{n >= 1}x^n/n^m". The program uses the power series when
       "|x|^2 <= 1/2", and the power series expansion in " log (x)" otherwise. It is valid in a
       large domain (at least "|x| < 230"), but should not be used too far away from the unit
       circle since it is then better to use the functional equation linking the value at "x" to
       the value at "1/x", which takes a trivial form for the variant below. Power series,
       polynomial, rational and vector/matrix arguments are allowed.

       For the variants to follow we need a notation: let " Re _m" denotes " Re " or " Im "
       depending whether "m" is odd or even.

       If "flag = 1": modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called "~ D_m(x)" in Zagier, defined
       for "|x| <= 1" by

         " Re _m(sum_{k = 0}^{m-1} ((- log |x|)^k)/(k!)Li_{m-k}(x) +((- log |x|)^{m-1})/(m!) log
       |1-x|)."

       If "flag = 2": modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called D_m(x) in Zagier, defined for
       "|x| <= 1" by

         " Re _m(sum_{k = 0}^{m-1}((- log |x|)^k)/(k!)Li_{m-k}(x) -(1)/(2)((- log |x|)^m)/(m!))."

       If "flag = 3": another modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called P_m(x) in Zagier,
       defined for "|x| <= 1" by

         " Re _m(sum_{k = 0}^{m-1}(2^kB_k)/(k!)( log |x|)^kLi_{m-k}(x) -(2^{m-1}B_m)/(m!)( log
       |x|)^m)."

       These three functions satisfy the functional equation "f_m(1/x) = (-1)^{m-1}f_m(x)".

       The library syntax is polylog0"(m,x,flag,prec)".

   psi"(x)"
       the "psi"-function of "x", i.e. the logarithmic derivative "Gamma'(x)/Gamma(x)".

       The library syntax is gpsi"(x,prec)".

   sin"(x)"
       sine of "x".

       The library syntax is gsin"(x,prec)".

   sinh"(x)"
       hyperbolic sine of "x".

       The library syntax is gsh"(x,prec)".

   sqr"(x)"
       square of "x". This operation is not completely straightforward, i.e. identical to "x *
       x", since it can usually be computed more efficiently (roughly one-half of the elementary
       multiplications can be saved). Also, squaring a 2-adic number increases its precision. For
       example,

         ? (1 + O(2^4))^2
         %1 = 1 + O(2^5)
         ? (1 + O(2^4)) * (1 + O(2^4))
         %2 = 1 + O(2^4)

       Note that this function is also called whenever one multiplies two objects which are known
       to be identical, e.g. they are the value of the same variable, or we are computing a
       power.

         ? x = (1 + O(2^4)); x * x
         %3 = 1 + O(2^5)
         ? (1 + O(2^4))^4
         %4 = 1 + O(2^6)

       (note the difference between %2 and %3 above).

       The library syntax is gsqr"(x)".

   sqrt"(x)"
       principal branch of the square root of "x", i.e. such that "Arg(sqrt(x)) belongs to
       ]-Pi/2, Pi/2]", or in other words such that " Re (sqrt(x)) > 0" or " Re (sqrt(x)) = 0" and
       " Im (sqrt(x)) >= 0". If "x belongs to R" and "x < 0", then the result is complex with
       positive imaginary part.

       Integermod a prime and "p"-adics are allowed as arguments. In that case, the square root
       (if it exists) which is returned is the one whose first "p"-adic digit (or its unique
       "p"-adic digit in the case of integermods) is in the interval "[0,p/2]". When the argument
       is an integermod a non-prime (or a non-prime-adic), the result is undefined.

       The library syntax is gsqrt"(x,prec)".

   sqrtn"(x,n,{&z})"
       principal branch of the "n"th root of "x", i.e. such that "Arg(sqrt(x)) belongs to
       ]-Pi/n, Pi/n]".

       Integermod a prime and "p"-adics are allowed as arguments.

       If "z" is present, it is set to a suitable root of unity allowing to recover all the other
       roots. If it was not possible, z is set to zero.

       The following script computes all roots in all possible cases:

         sqrtnall(x,n)=
         {
           local(V,r,z,r2);
           r = sqrtn(x,n, &z);
           if (!z, error("Impossible case in sqrtn"));
           if (type(x) == "t_INTMOD" || type(x)=="t_PADIC" ,
             r2 = r*z; n = 1;
             while (r2!=r, r2*=z;n++));
           V = vector(n); V[1] = r;
           for(i=2, n, V[i] = V[i-1]*z);
           V
         }
         addhelp(sqrtnall,"sqrtnall(x,n):compute the vector of nth-roots of x");

       The library syntax is gsqrtn"(x,n,&z,prec)".

   tan"(x)"
       tangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gtan"(x,prec)".

   tanh"(x)"
       hyperbolic tangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gth"(x,prec)".

   teichmuller"(x)"
       Teichmueller character of the "p"-adic number "x".

       The library syntax is teich"(x)".

   theta"(q,z)"
       Jacobi sine theta-function.

       The library syntax is theta"(q,z,prec)".

   thetanullk"(q,k)"
       "k"-th derivative at "z = 0" of "theta(q,z)".

       The library syntax is thetanullk"(q,k,prec)", where "k" is a "long".

   weber"(x,{flag = 0})"
       one of Weber's three "f" functions.  If "flag = 0", returns

         "f(x) =  exp (-iPi/24).eta((x+1)/2)/eta(x)   such that  j = (f^{24}-16)^3/f^{24},"

       where "j" is the elliptic "j"-invariant  (see the function "ellj").  If "flag = 1",
       returns

         "f_1(x) = eta(x/2)/eta(x)  such that  j = (f_1^{24}+16)^3/f_1^{24}."

       Finally, if "flag = 2", returns

         "f_2(x) =  sqrt {2}eta(2x)/eta(x)  such that  j = (f_2^{24}+16)^3/f_2^{24}."

       Note the identities "f^8 = f_1^8+f_2^8" and "ff_1f_2 =  sqrt 2".

       The library syntax is weber0"(x,flag,prec)", or "wf(x,prec)", "wf1(x,prec)" or
       "wf2(x,prec)".

   zeta"(s)"
       Riemann's zeta function "zeta(s) = sum_{n >= 1}n^{-s}", computed using the Euler-Maclaurin
       summation formula, except when "s" is of type integer, in which case it is computed using
       Bernoulli numbers for "s <= 0" or "s > 0" and even, and using modular forms for "s > 0"
       and odd.

       The library syntax is gzeta"(s,prec)".

Arithmetic functions
       These functions are by definition functions whose natural domain of definition is either Z
       (or "Z_{ > 0}"), or sometimes polynomials over a base ring. Functions which concern
       polynomials exclusively will be explained in the next section. The way these functions are
       used is completely different from transcendental functions: in general only the types
       integer and polynomial are accepted as arguments. If a vector or matrix type is given, the
       function will be applied on each coefficient independently.

       In the present version 2.2.0, all arithmetic functions in the narrow sense of the word ---
       Euler's totient function, the Moebius function, the sums over divisors or powers of
       divisors etc.--- call, after trial division by small primes, the same versatile factoring
       machinery described under "factorint". It includes Shanks SQUFOF, Pollard Rho, ECM and
       MPQS stages, and has an early exit option for the functions moebius and (the integer
       function underlying) issquarefree. Note that it relies on a (fairly strong) probabilistic
       primality test: numbers found to be strong pseudo-primes after 10 successful trials of the
       Rabin-Miller test are declared primes.

   addprimes"({x = []})"
       adds the primes contained in the vector "x" (or the single integer "x") to the table
       computed upon GP initialization (by "pari_init" in library mode), and returns a row vector
       whose first entries contain all primes added by the user and whose last entries have been
       filled up with 1's. In total the returned row vector has 100 components.  Whenever
       "factor" or "smallfact" is subsequently called, first the primes in the table computed by
       "pari_init" will be checked, and then the additional primes in this table. If "x" is empty
       or omitted, just returns the current list of extra primes.

       The entries in "x" are not checked for primality. They need only be positive integers not
       divisible by any of the pre-computed primes. It's in fact a nice trick to add composite
       numbers, which for example the function "factor(x,0)" was not able to factor. In case the
       message ``impossible inverse modulo "<"some integermod">"'' shows up afterwards, you have
       just stumbled over a non-trivial factor. Note that the arithmetic functions in the narrow
       sense, like eulerphi, do not use this extra table.

       The present PARI version 2.2.0 allows up to 100 user-specified primes to be appended to
       the table. This limit may be changed by altering "NUMPRTBELT" in file "init.c". To remove
       primes from the list use "removeprimes".

       The library syntax is addprimes"(x)".

   bestappr"(x,k)"
       if "x belongs to R", finds the best rational approximation to "x" with denominator at most
       equal to "k" using continued fractions.

       The library syntax is bestappr"(x,k)".

   bezout"(x,y)"
       finds "u" and "v" minimal in a natural sense such that "x*u+y*v = gcd(x,y)". The arguments
       must be both integers or both polynomials, and the result is a row vector with three
       components "u", "v", and "gcd(x,y)".

       The library syntax is vecbezout"(x,y)" to get the vector, or "gbezout(x,y, &u, &v)" which
       gives as result the address of the created gcd, and puts the addresses of the
       corresponding created objects into "u" and "v".

   bezoutres"(x,y)"
       as "bezout", with the resultant of "x" and "y" replacing the gcd.

       The library syntax is vecbezoutres"(x,y)" to get the vector, or "subresext(x,y, &u, &v)"
       which gives as result the address of the created gcd, and puts the addresses of the
       corresponding created objects into "u" and "v".

   bigomega"(x)"
       number of prime divisors of "|x|" counted with multiplicity. "x" must be an integer.

       The library syntax is bigomega"(x)", the result is a "long".

   binomial"(x,y)"
       binomial coefficient "\binom x y".  Here "y" must be an integer, but "x" can be any PARI
       object.

       The library syntax is binome"(x,y)", where "y" must be a "long".

   chinese"(x,y)"
       if "x" and "y" are both integermods or both polmods, creates (with the same type) a "z" in
       the same residue class as "x" and in the same residue class as "y", if it is possible.

       This function also allows vector and matrix arguments, in which case the operation is
       recursively applied to each component of the vector or matrix.  For polynomial arguments,
       it is applied to each coefficient. Finally "chinese(x,x) = x" regardless of the type of
       "x"; this allows vector arguments to contain other data, so long as they are identical in
       both vectors.

       The library syntax is chinois"(x,y)".

   content"(x)"
       computes the gcd of all the coefficients of "x", when this gcd makes sense. If "x" is a
       scalar, this simply returns "x". If "x" is a polynomial (and by extension a power series),
       it gives the usual content of "x". If "x" is a rational function, it gives the ratio of
       the contents of the numerator and the denominator. Finally, if "x" is a vector or a
       matrix, it gives the gcd of all the entries.

       The library syntax is content"(x)".

   contfrac"(x,{b},{lmax})"
       creates the row vector whose components are the partial quotients of the continued
       fraction expansion of "x", the number of partial quotients being limited to "lmax".  If
       "x" is a real number, the expansion stops at the last significant partial quotient if
       "lmax" is omitted. "x" can also be a rational function or a power series.

       If a vector "b" is supplied, the numerators will be equal to the coefficients of "b". The
       length of the result is then equal to the length of "b", unless a partial remainder is
       encountered which is equal to zero. In which case the expansion stops. In the case of real
       numbers, the stopping criterion is thus different from the one mentioned above since, if
       "b" is too long, some partial quotients may not be significant.

       If "b" is an integer, the command is understood as "contfrac(x,lmax)".

       The library syntax is contfrac0"(x,b,lmax)". Also available are "gboundcf(x,lmax)",
       "gcf(x)", or "gcf2(b,x)", where "lmax" is a C integer.

   contfracpnqn"(x)"
       when "x" is a vector or a one-row matrix, "x" is considered as the list of partial
       quotients "[a_0,a_1,...,a_n]" of a rational number, and the result is the 2 by 2 matrix
       "[p_n,p_{n-1};q_n,q_{n-1}]" in the standard notation of continued fractions, so "p_n/q_n =
       a_0+1/(a_1+...+1/a_n)...)". If "x" is a matrix with two rows "[b_0,b_1,...,b_n]" and
       "[a_0,a_1,...,a_n]", this is then considered as a generalized continued fraction and we
       have similarly "p_n/q_n = 1/b_0(a_0+b_1/(a_1+...+b_n/a_n)...)". Note that in this case one
       usually has "b_0 = 1".

       The library syntax is pnqn"(x)".

   core"(n,{flag = 0})"
       if "n" is a non-zero integer written as "n = df^2" with "d" squarefree, returns "d". If
       "flag" is non-zero, returns the two-element row vector "[d,f]".

       The library syntax is core0"(n,flag)".  Also available are "core(n)" ( = core"(n,0)") and
       "core2(n)" ( = core"(n,1)").

   coredisc"(n,{flag})"
       if "n" is a non-zero integer written as "n = df^2" with "d" fundamental discriminant
       (including 1), returns "d". If "flag" is non-zero, returns the two-element row vector
       "[d,f]". Note that if "n" is not congruent to 0 or 1 modulo 4, "f" will be a half integer
       and not an integer.

       The library syntax is coredisc0"(n,flag)".  Also available are "coredisc(n)" ( =
       coredisc"(n,0)") and "coredisc2(n)" ( = coredisc"(n,1)").

   dirdiv"(x,y)"
       "x" and "y" being vectors of perhaps different lengths but with "y[1] ! = 0" considered as
       Dirichlet series, computes the quotient of "x" by "y", again as a vector.

       The library syntax is dirdiv"(x,y)".

   direuler"(p = a,b,expr,{c})"
       computes the Dirichlet series to "b" terms of the Euler product of expression expr as "p"
       ranges through the primes from "a" to "b".  expr must be a polynomial or rational function
       in another variable than "p" (say "X") and "expr(X)" is understood as the Dirichlet series
       (or more precisely the local factor) "expr(p^{-s})". If "c" is present, output only the
       first "c" coefficients in the series.

       The library syntax is direuler"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr)"

   dirmul"(x,y)"
       "x" and "y" being vectors of perhaps different lengths considered as Dirichlet series,
       computes the product of "x" by "y", again as a vector.

       The library syntax is dirmul"(x,y)".

   divisors"(x)"
       creates a row vector whose components are the positive divisors of the integer "x" in
       increasing order. The factorization of "x" (as output by "factor") can be used instead.

       The library syntax is divisors"(x)".

   eulerphi"(x)"
       Euler's "phi" (totient) function of "|x|", in other words "|(Z/xZ)^*|". "x" must be of
       type integer.

       The library syntax is phi"(x)".

   factor"(x,{lim = -1})"
       general factorization function.  If "x" is of type integer, rational, polynomial or
       rational function, the result is a two-column matrix, the first column being the
       irreducibles dividing "x" (prime numbers or polynomials), and the second the exponents.
       If "x" is a vector or a matrix, the factoring is done componentwise (hence the result is a
       vector or matrix of two-column matrices). By definition, 0 is factored as "0^1".

       If "x" is of type integer or rational, an argument lim can be added, meaning that we look
       only for factors up to lim, or to "primelimit", whichever is lowest (except when "lim = 0"
       where the effect is identical to setting "lim = primelimit"). Hence in this case, the
       remaining part is not necessarily prime. See factorint for more information about the
       algorithms used.

       The polynomials or rational functions to be factored must have scalar coefficients. In
       particular PARI does not know how to factor multivariate polynomials.

       Note that PARI tries to guess in a sensible way over which ring you want to factor. Note
       also that factorization of polynomials is done up to multiplication by a constant. In
       particular, the factors of rational polynomials will have integer coefficients, and the
       content of a polynomial or rational function is discarded and not included in the
       factorization. If you need it, you can always ask for the content explicitly:

         ? factor(t^2 + 5/2*t + 1)
         %1 =
         [2*t + 1 1]

         [t + 2 1]

         ? content(t^2 + 5/2*t + 1)
         %2 = 1/2

       See also factornf.

       The library syntax is factor0"(x,lim)", where lim is a C integer.  Also available are
       "factor(x)" ( = "factor0(x,-1)"), "smallfact(x)" ( = "factor0(x,0)").

   factorback"(f,{nf})"
       "f" being any factorization, gives back the factored object. If a second argument "nf" is
       supplied, "f" is assumed to be a prime ideal factorization in the number field "nf".  The
       resulting ideal is given in HNF form.

       The library syntax is factorback"(f,nf)", where an omitted "nf" is entered as "NULL".

   factorcantor"(x,p)"
       factors the polynomial "x" modulo the prime "p", using distinct degree plus Cantor-
       Zassenhaus. The coefficients of "x" must be operation-compatible with "Z/pZ". The result
       is a two-column matrix, the first column being the irreducible polynomials dividing "x",
       and the second the exponents.  If you want only the degrees of the irreducible polynomials
       (for example for computing an "L"-function), use "factormod(x,p,1)". Note that the
       "factormod" algorithm is usually faster than "factorcantor".

       The library syntax is factcantor"(x,p)".

   factorff"(x,p,a)"
       factors the polynomial "x" in the field "F_q" defined by the irreducible polynomial "a"
       over "F_p". The coefficients of "x" must be operation-compatible with "Z/pZ". The result
       is a two-column matrix, the first column being the irreducible polynomials dividing "x",
       and the second the exponents. It is recommended to use for the variable of "a" (which will
       be used as variable of a polmod) a name distinct from the other variables used, so that a
       "lift()" of the result will be legible. If all the coefficients of "x" are in "F_p", a
       much faster algorithm is applied, using the computation of isomorphisms between finite
       fields.

       The library syntax is factmod9"(x,p,a)".

   factorial"(x)" or "x!"
       factorial of "x". The expression "x!"  gives a result which is an integer, while
       factorial(x) gives a real number.

       The library syntax is mpfact"(x)" for "x!" and "mpfactr(x,prec)" for factorial(x). "x"
       must be a "long" integer and not a PARI integer.

   factorint"(n,{flag = 0})"
       factors the integer n using a combination of the Shanks SQUFOF and Pollard Rho method
       (with modifications due to Brent), Lenstra's ECM (with modifications by Montgomery), and
       MPQS (the latter adapted from the LiDIA code with the kind permission of the LiDIA
       maintainers), as well as a search for pure powers with exponents" <= 10". The output is a
       two-column matrix as for "factor".

       This gives direct access to the integer factoring engine called by most arithmetical
       functions. flag is optional; its binary digits mean 1: avoid MPQS, 2: skip first stage ECM
       (we may still fall back to it later), 4: avoid Rho and SQUFOF, 8: don't run final ECM (as
       a result, a huge composite may be declared to be prime). Note that a (strong)
       probabilistic primality test is used; thus composites might (very rarely) not be detected.

       The machinery underlying this function is still in a somewhat experimental state, but
       should be much faster on average than pure ECM as used by all PARI versions up to 2.0.8,
       at the expense of heavier memory use. You are invited to play with the flag settings and
       watch the internals at work by using GP's "debuglevel" default parameter (level 3 shows
       just the outline, 4 turns on time keeping, 5 and above show an increasing amount of
       internal details). If you see anything funny happening, please let us know.

       The library syntax is factorint"(n,flag)".

   factormod"(x,p,{flag = 0})"
       factors the polynomial "x" modulo the prime integer "p", using Berlekamp. The coefficients
       of "x" must be operation-compatible with "Z/pZ". The result is a two-column matrix, the
       first column being the irreducible polynomials dividing "x", and the second the exponents.
       If "flag" is non-zero, outputs only the degrees of the irreducible polynomials (for
       example, for computing an "L"-function). A different algorithm for computing the mod "p"
       factorization is "factorcantor" which is sometimes faster.

       The library syntax is factormod"(x,p,flag)". Also available are "factmod(x,p)" (which is
       equivalent to "factormod(x,p,0)") and "simplefactmod(x,p)" ( = "factormod(x,p,1)").

   fibonacci"(x)"
       "x^{th}" Fibonacci number.

       The library syntax is fibo"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

   ffinit"(p,n,{v = x})"
       computes a monic polynomial of degree "n" which is irreducible over "F_p". For instance if
       "P = ffinit(3,2,y)", you can represent elements in "F_{3^2}" as polmods modulo "P".

       The library syntax is ffinit"(p,n,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

   gcd"(x,y,{flag = 0})"
       creates the greatest common divisor of "x" and "y". "x" and "y" can be of quite general
       types, for instance both rational numbers. Vector/matrix types are also accepted, in which
       case the GCD is taken recursively on each component. Note that for these types, "gcd" is
       not commutative.

       If "flag = 0", use Euclid's algorithm.

       If "flag = 1", use the modular gcd algorithm ("x" and "y" have to be polynomials, with
       integer coefficients).

       If "flag = 2", use the subresultant algorithm.

       The library syntax is gcd0"(x,y,flag)". Also available are "ggcd(x,y)", "modulargcd(x,y)",
       and "srgcd(x,y)" corresponding to "flag = 0", 1 and 2 respectively.

   hilbert"(x,y,{p})"
       Hilbert symbol of "x" and "y" modulo "p". If "x" and "y" are of type integer or fraction,
       an explicit third parameter "p" must be supplied, "p = 0" meaning the place at infinity.
       Otherwise, "p" needs not be given, and "x" and "y" can be of compatible types integer,
       fraction, real, integermod a prime (result is undefined if the modulus is not prime), or
       "p"-adic.

       The library syntax is hil"(x,y,p)".

   isfundamental"(x)"
       true (1) if "x" is equal to 1 or to the discriminant of a quadratic field, false (0)
       otherwise.

       The library syntax is gisfundamental"(x)", but the simpler function "isfundamental(x)"
       which returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known to be of type integer.

   isprime"(x,{flag = 0})"
       if "flag = 0" (default), true (1) if "x" is a strong pseudo-prime for 10 randomly chosen
       bases, false (0) otherwise.

       If "flag = 1", use Pocklington-Lehmer ``P-1'' test. true (1) if "x" is prime, false (0)
       otherwise.

       If "flag = 2", use Pocklington-Lehmer ``P-1'' test and output a primality certificate as
       follows: return 0 if "x" is composite, 1 if "x" is a small prime (currently strictly less
       than "341 550 071 728 321"), and a matrix if "x" is a large prime.  The matrix has three
       columns. The first contains the prime factors "p", the second the corresponding elements
       "a_p" as in Proposition 8.3.1 in GTM 138, and the third the output of isprime(p,2).

       In the two last cases, the algorithm fails if one of the (strong pseudo-)prime factors is
       not prime, but it should be exceedingly rare.

       The library syntax is gisprime"(x,flag)", but the simpler function "isprime(x)" which
       returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known to be of type integer. Also available is
       "plisprime(N,flag)", corresponding to "gisprime(x,flag+1)" if "x" is known to be of type
       integer.

   ispseudoprime"(x)"
       true (1) if "x" is a strong pseudo-prime for a randomly chosen base, false (0) otherwise.

       The library syntax is gispsp"(x)", but the simpler function "ispsp(x)" which returns a
       "long" should be used if "x" is known to be of type integer.

   issquare"(x,{&n})"
       true (1) if "x" is square, false (0) if not. "x" can be of any type. If "n" is given and
       an exact square root had to be computed in the checking process, puts that square root in
       "n". This is in particular the case when "x" is an integer or a polynomial. This is not
       the case for intmods (use quadratic reciprocity) or series (only check the leading
       coefficient).

       The library syntax is gcarrecomplet"(x,&n)". Also available is "gcarreparfait(x)".

   issquarefree"(x)"
       true (1) if "x" is squarefree, false (0) if not.  Here "x" can be an integer or a
       polynomial.

       The library syntax is gissquarefree"(x)", but the simpler function "issquarefree(x)" which
       returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known to be of type integer. This issquarefree
       is just the square of the Moebius function, and is computed as a multiplicative arithmetic
       function much like the latter.

   kronecker"(x,y)"
       Kronecker (i.e. generalized Legendre) symbol "((x)/(y))". "x" and "y" must be of type
       integer.

       The library syntax is kronecker"(x,y)", the result (0 or "+- 1") is a "long".

   lcm"(x,y)"
       least common multiple of "x" and "y", i.e. such that "lcm(x,y)*gcd(x,y) = abs(x*y)".

       The library syntax is glcm"(x,y)".

   moebius"(x)"
       Moebius "mu"-function of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is mu"(x)", the result (0 or "+- 1") is a "long".

   nextprime"(x)"
       finds the smallest prime greater than or equal to "x". "x" can be of any real type. Note
       that if "x" is a prime, this function returns "x" and not the smallest prime strictly
       larger than "x".

       The library syntax is nextprime"(x)".

   numdiv"(x)"
       number of divisors of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer, and the result is a "long".

       The library syntax is numbdiv"(x)".

   omega"(x)"
       number of distinct prime divisors of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is omega"(x)", the result is a "long".

   precprime"(x)"
       finds the largest prime less than or equal to "x". "x" can be of any real type. Returns 0
       if "x <= 1".  Note that if "x" is a prime, this function returns "x" and not the largest
       prime strictly smaller than "x".

       The library syntax is precprime"(x)".

   prime"(x)"
       the "x^{th}" prime number, which must be among the precalculated primes.

       The library syntax is prime"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

   primes"(x)"
       creates a row vector whose components are the first "x" prime numbers, which must be among
       the precalculated primes.

       The library syntax is primes"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

   qfbclassno"(x,{flag = 0})"
       class number of the quadratic field of discriminant "x". In the present version 2.2.0, a
       simple algorithm is used for "x > 0", so "x" should not be too large (say "x < 10^7") for
       the time to be reasonable. On the other hand, for "x < 0" one can reasonably compute
       classno("x") for "|x| < 10^{25}", since the method used is Shanks' method which is in
       "O(|x|^{1/4})". For larger values of "|D|", see "quadclassunit".

       If "flag = 1", compute the class number using Euler products and the functional equation.
       However, it is in "O(|x|^{1/2})".

       Important warning. For "D < 0", this function often gives incorrect results when the class
       group is non-cyclic, because the authors were too lazy to implement Shanks' method
       completely. It is therefore strongly recommended to use either the version with "flag =
       1", the function "qfbhclassno(-x)" if "x" is known to be a fundamental discriminant, or
       the function "quadclassunit".

       The library syntax is qfbclassno0"(x,flag)". Also available are "classno(x)" ( =
       "qfbclassno(x)"), "classno2(x)" ( = "qfbclassno(x,1)"), and finally there exists the
       function "hclassno(x)" which computes the class number of an imaginary quadratic field by
       counting reduced forms, an "O(|x|)" algorithm. See also "qfbhclassno".

   qfbcompraw"(x,y)"
       composition of the binary quadratic forms "x" and "y", without reduction of the result.
       This is useful e.g. to compute a generating element of an ideal.

       The library syntax is compraw"(x,y)".

   qfbhclassno"(x)"
       Hurwitz class number of "x", where "x" is non-negative and congruent to 0 or 3 modulo 4.
       See also "qfbclassno".

       The library syntax is hclassno"(x)".

   qfbnucomp"(x,y,l)"
       composition of the primitive positive definite binary quadratic forms "x" and "y" using
       the NUCOMP and NUDUPL algorithms of Shanks (a la Atkin). "l" is any positive constant, but
       for optimal speed, one should take "l = |D|^{1/4}", where "D" is the common discriminant
       of "x" and "y". When "x" and "y" do not have the same discriminant, the result is
       undefined.

       The library syntax is nucomp"(x,y,l)". The auxiliary function "nudupl(x,l)" should be used
       instead for speed when "x = y".

   qfbnupow"(x,n)"
       "n"-th power of the primitive positive definite binary quadratic form "x" using the NUCOMP
       and NUDUPL algorithms (see "qfbnucomp").

       The library syntax is nupow"(x,n)".

   qfbpowraw"(x,n)"
       "n"-th power of the binary quadratic form "x", computed without doing any reduction
       (i.e. using "qfbcompraw").  Here "n" must be non-negative and "n < 2^{31}".

       The library syntax is powraw"(x,n)" where "n" must be a "long" integer.

   qfbprimeform"(x,p)"
       prime binary quadratic form of discriminant "x" whose first coefficient is the prime
       number "p". By abuse of notation, "p = 1" is a valid special case which returns the unit
       form. Returns an error if "x" is not a quadratic residue mod "p". In the case where "x >
       0", the ``distance'' component of the form is set equal to zero according to the current
       precision.

       The library syntax is primeform"(x,p,prec)", where the third variable "prec" is a "long",
       but is only taken into account when "x > 0".

   qfbred"(x,{flag = 0},{D},{isqrtD},{sqrtD})"
       reduces the binary quadratic form "x" (updating Shanks's distance function if "x" is
       indefinite). The binary digits of "flag" are toggles meaning

         1: perform a single reduction step

         2: don't update Shanks's distance

       "D", isqrtD, sqrtD, if present, supply the values of the discriminant, "\lfloor  sqrt
       {D}\rfloor", and " sqrt {D}" respectively (no checking is done of these facts). If "D < 0"
       these values are useless, and all references to Shanks's distance are irrelevant.

       The library syntax is qfbred0"(x,flag,D,isqrtD,sqrtD)". Use "NULL" to omit any of "D",
       isqrtD, sqrtD.

       Also available are

       "redimag(x)" ( = "qfbred(x)" where "x" is definite),

       and for indefinite forms:

       "redreal(x)" ( = "qfbred(x)"),

       "rhoreal(x)" ( = "qfbred(x,1)"),

       "redrealnod(x,sq)" ( = "qfbred(x,2,,isqrtD)"),

       "rhorealnod(x,sq)" ( = "qfbred(x,3,,isqrtD)").

   quadclassunit"(D,{flag = 0},{tech = []})"
       Buchmann-McCurley's sub-exponential algorithm for computing the class group of a quadratic
       field of discriminant "D". If "D" is not fundamental, the function may or may not be
       defined, but usually is, and often gives the right answer (a warning is issued). The more
       general function "bnrinit" should be used to compute the class group of an order.

       This function should be used instead of "qfbclassno" or "quadregula" when "D < -10^{25}",
       "D > 10^{10}", or when the structure is wanted.

       If "flag" is non-zero and "D > 0", computes the narrow class group and regulator, instead
       of the ordinary (or wide) ones. In the current version 2.2.0, this doesn't work at all :
       use the general function "bnfnarrow".

       Optional parameter tech is a row vector of the form "[c_1,c_2]", where "c_1" and "c_2" are
       positive real numbers which control the execution time and the stack size. To get maximum
       speed, set "c_2 = c". To get a rigorous result (under GRH) you must take "c_2 = 6".
       Reasonable values for "c" are between 0.1 and 2.

       The result of this function is a vector "v" with 4 components if "D < 0", and 5 otherwise.
       The correspond respectively to

       "*" "v[1]" : the class number

       "*" "v[2]" : a vector giving the structure of the class group as a product of cyclic
       groups;

       "*" "v[3]" : a vector giving generators of those cyclic groups (as binary quadratic
       forms).

       "*" "v[4]" : (omitted if "D < 0") the regulator, computed to an accuracy which is the
       maximum of an internal accuracy determined by the program and the current default (note
       that once the regulator is known to a small accuracy it is trivial to compute it to very
       high accuracy, see the tutorial).

       "*" "v[5]" : a measure of the correctness of the result. If it is close to 1, the result
       is correct (under GRH). If it is close to a larger integer, this shows that the class
       number is off by a factor equal to this integer, and you must start again with a larger
       value for "c_1" or a different random seed. In this case, a warning message is printed.

       The library syntax is quadclassunit0"(D,flag,tech)". Also available are
       "buchimag(D,c_1,c_2)" and "buchreal(D,flag,c_1,c_2)".

   quaddisc"(x)"
       discriminant of the quadratic field "Q( sqrt {x})", where "x belongs to Q".

       The library syntax is quaddisc"(x)".

   quadhilbert"(D,{flag = 0})"
       relative equation defining the Hilbert class field of the quadratic field of discriminant
       "D".  If "flag" is non-zero and "D < 0", outputs "[form,root(form)]" (to be used for
       constructing subfields). If "flag" is non-zero and "D > 0", try hard to get the best
       modulus.  Uses complex multiplication in the imaginary case and Stark units in the real
       case.

       The library syntax is quadhilbert"(D,flag,prec)".

   quadgen"(x)"
       creates the quadratic number "omega = (a+ sqrt {x})/2" where "a = 0" if "x = 0 mod 4", "a
       = 1" if "x = 1 mod 4", so that "(1,omega)" is an integral basis for the quadratic order of
       discriminant "x". "x" must be an integer congruent to 0 or 1 modulo 4.

       The library syntax is quadgen"(x)".

   quadpoly"(D,{v = x})"
       creates the ``canonical'' quadratic polynomial (in the variable "v") corresponding to the
       discriminant "D", i.e. the minimal polynomial of quadgen(x). "D" must be an integer
       congruent to 0 or 1 modulo 4.

       The library syntax is quadpoly0"(x,v)".

   quadray"(D,f,{flag = 0})"
       relative equation for the ray class field of conductor "f" for the quadratic field of
       discriminant "D" (which can also be a "bnf"), using analytic methods.

       For "D < 0", uses the "sigma" function. "flag" has the following meaning: if it's an odd
       integer, outputs instead the vector of "[ideal, corresponding root]". It can also be a
       two-component vector "[lambda,flag]", where flag is as above and "lambda" is the technical
       element of "bnf" necessary for Schertz's method. In that case, returns 0 if "lambda" is
       not suitable.

       For "D > 0", uses Stark's conjecture. If "flag" is non-zero, try hard to get the best
       modulus. The function may fail with the following message

         "Cannot find a suitable modulus in FindModulus"

       See "bnrstark" for more details about the real case.

       The library syntax is quadray"(D,f,flag)".

   quadregulator"(x)"
       regulator of the quadratic field of positive discriminant "x". Returns an error if "x" is
       not a discriminant (fundamental or not) or if "x" is a square. See also "quadclassunit" if
       "x" is large.

       The library syntax is regula"(x,prec)".

   quadunit"(x)"
       fundamental unit of the real quadratic field "Q( sqrt  x)" where  "x" is the positive
       discriminant of the field. If "x" is not a fundamental discriminant, this probably gives
       the fundamental unit of the corresponding order. "x" must be of type integer, and the
       result is a quadratic number.

       The library syntax is fundunit"(x)".

   removeprimes"({x = []})"
       removes the primes listed in "x" from the prime number table. In particular
       "removeprimes(addprimes)" empties the extra prime table. "x" can also be a single integer.
       List the current extra primes if "x" is omitted.

       The library syntax is removeprimes"(x)".

   sigma"(x,{k = 1})"
       sum of the "k^{th}" powers of the positive divisors of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is sumdiv"(x)" ( = "sigma(x)") or "gsumdivk(x,k)" ( = "sigma(x,k)"),
       where "k" is a C long integer.

   sqrtint"(x)"
       integer square root of "x", which must be of PARI type integer. The result is non-negative
       and rounded towards zero. A negative "x" is allowed, and the result in that case is
       "I*sqrtint(-x)".

       The library syntax is racine"(x)".

   znlog"(x,g)"
       "g" must be a primitive root mod a prime "p", and the result is the discrete log of "x" in
       the multiplicative group "(Z/pZ)^*". This function using a simple-minded
       baby-step/giant-step approach and requires "O( sqrt {p})" storage, hence it cannot be used
       for "p" greater than about "10^{13}".

       The library syntax is znlog"(x,g)".

   znorder"(x)"
       "x" must be an integer mod "n", and the result is the order of "x" in the multiplicative
       group "(Z/nZ)^*". Returns an error if "x" is not invertible.

       The library syntax is order"(x)".

   znprimroot"(x)"
       returns a primitive root of "x", where "x" is a prime power.

       The library syntax is gener"(x)".

   znstar"(n)"
       gives the structure of the multiplicative group "(Z/nZ)^*" as a 3-component row vector
       "v", where "v[1] = phi(n)" is the order of that group, "v[2]" is a "k"-component row-
       vector "d" of integers "d[i]" such that "d[i] > 1" and "d[i] | d[i-1]" for "i >= 2" and
       "(Z/nZ)^*  ~  prod_{i = 1}^k(Z/d[i]Z)", and "v[3]" is a "k"-component row vector giving
       generators of the image of the cyclic groups "Z/d[i]Z".

       The library syntax is znstar"(n)".

Functions related to elliptic curves
       We have implemented a number of functions which are useful for number theorists working on
       elliptic curves. We always use Tate's notations.  The functions assume that the curve is
       given by a general Weierstrass model

         " y^2+a_1xy+a_3y = x^3+a_2x^2+a_4x+a_6, "

       where a priori the "a_i" can be of any scalar type. This curve can be considered as a
       five-component vector "E = [a1,a2,a3,a4,a6]". Points on "E" are represented as two-
       component vectors "[x,y]", except for the point at infinity, i.e. the identity element of
       the group law, represented by the one-component vector "[0]".

       It is useful to have at one's disposal more information. This is given by the function
       "ellinit" (see there), which usually gives a 19 component vector (which we will call a
       long vector in this section). If a specific flag is added, a vector with only 13 component
       will be output (which we will call a medium vector). A medium vector just gives the first
       13 components of the long vector corresponding to the same curve, but is of course faster
       to compute. The following member functions are available to deal with the output of
       "ellinit":

         "a1"--"a6", "b2"--"b8", "c4"--"c6"  : coefficients of the elliptic curve.

         "area"  :    volume of the complex lattice defining "E".

         "disc"  :   discriminant of the curve.

         "j"     :   "j"-invariant of the curve.

         "omega" :   "[omega_1,omega_2]", periods forming a basis of the complex lattice defining
       "E" ("omega_1" is the

                          real period, and "omega_2/omega_1" belongs to Poincare's half-plane).

         "eta"   :   quasi-periods "[eta_1, eta_2]", such that "eta_1omega_2-eta_2omega_1 = iPi".

         "roots" :   roots of the associated Weierstrass equation.

         "tate"  :   "[u^2,u,v]" in the notation of Tate.

         "w"  :   Mestre's "w" (this is technical).

       Their use is best described by an example: assume that "E" was output by "ellinit", then
       typing "E.disc" will retrieve the curve's discriminant. The member functions "area", "eta"
       and "omega" are only available for curves over Q. Conversely, "tate" and "w" are only
       available for curves defined over "Q_p".

       Some functions, in particular those relative to height computations (see "ellheight")
       require also that the curve be in minimal Weierstrass form. This is achieved by the
       function "ellglobalred".

       All functions related to elliptic curves share the prefix "ell", and the precise curve we
       are interested in is always the first argument, in either one of the three formats
       discussed above, unless otherwise specified. For instance, in functions which do not use
       the extra information given by long vectors, the curve can be given either as a five-
       component vector, or by one of the longer vectors computed by "ellinit".

   elladd"(E,z1,z2)"
       sum of the points "z1" and "z2" on the elliptic curve corresponding to the vector "E".

       The library syntax is addell"(E,z1,z2)".

   ellak"(E,n)"
       computes the coefficient "a_n" of the "L"-function of the elliptic curve "E", i.e. in
       principle coefficients of a newform of weight 2 assuming Taniyama-Weil conjecture (which
       is now known to hold in full generality thanks to the work of Breuil, Conrad, Diamond,
       Taylor and Wiles). "E" must be a medium or long vector of the type given by "ellinit". For
       this function to work for every "n" and not just those prime to the conductor, "E" must be
       a minimal Weierstrass equation. If this is not the case, use the function "ellglobalred"
       first before using "ellak".

       The library syntax is akell"(E,n)".

   ellan"(E,n)"
       computes the vector of the first "n" "a_k" corresponding to the elliptic curve "E". All
       comments in "ellak" description remain valid.

       The library syntax is anell"(E,n)", where "n" is a C integer.

   ellap"(E,p,{flag = 0})"
       computes the "a_p" corresponding to the elliptic curve "E" and the prime number "p". These
       are defined by the equation "#E(F_p) = p+1 - a_p", where "#E(F_p)" stands for the number
       of points of the curve "E" over the finite field "F_p". When "flag" is 0, this uses the
       baby-step giant-step method and a trick due to Mestre. This runs in time "O(p^{1/4})" and
       requires "O(p^{1/4})" storage, hence becomes unreasonable when "p" has about 30 digits.

       If "flag" is 1, computes the "a_p" as a sum of Legendre symbols. This is slower than the
       previous method as soon as "p" is greater than 100, say.

       No checking is done that "p" is indeed prime. "E" must be a medium or long vector of the
       type given by "ellinit", defined over Q, "F_p" or "Q_p". "E" must be given by a
       Weierstrass equation minimal at "p".

       The library syntax is ellap0"(E,p,flag)". Also available are "apell(E,p)", corresponding
       to "flag = 0", and "apell2(E,p)" ("flag = 1").

   ellbil"(E,z1,z2)"
       if "z1" and "z2" are points on the elliptic curve "E", this function computes the value of
       the canonical bilinear form on "z1", "z2":

         " ellheight(E,z1+z2) - ellheight(E,z1) - ellheight(E,z2) "

       where "+" denotes of course addition on "E". In addition, "z1" or "z2" (but not both) can
       be vectors or matrices. Note that this is equal to twice some normalizations. "E" is
       assumed to be integral, given by a minimal model.

       The library syntax is bilhell"(E,z1,z2,prec)".

   ellchangecurve"(E,v)"
       changes the data for the elliptic curve "E" by changing the coordinates using the vector
       "v = [u,r,s,t]", i.e. if "x'" and "y'" are the new coordinates, then "x = u^2x'+r", "y =
       u^3y'+su^2x'+t".  The vector "E" must be a medium or long vector of the type given by
       "ellinit".

       The library syntax is coordch"(E,v)".

   ellchangepoint"(x,v)"
       changes the coordinates of the point or vector of points "x" using the vector "v =
       [u,r,s,t]", i.e. if "x'" and "y'" are the new coordinates, then "x = u^2x'+r", "y =
       u^3y'+su^2x'+t" (see also "ellchangecurve").

       The library syntax is pointch"(x,v)".

   elleisnum"(E,k,{flag = 0})"
       "E" being an elliptic curve as output by "ellinit" (or, alternatively, given by a
       2-component vector "[omega_1,omega_2]"), and "k" being an even positive integer, computes
       the numerical value of the Eisenstein series of weight "k" at "E". When flag is non-zero
       and "k = 4" or 6, returns "g_2" or "g_3" with the correct normalization.

       The library syntax is elleisnum"(E,k,flag)".

   elleta"(om)"
       returns the two-component row vector "[eta_1,eta_2]" of quasi-periods associated to "om =
       [omega_1, omega_2]"

       The library syntax is elleta"(om, prec)"

   ellglobalred"(E)"
       calculates the arithmetic conductor, the global minimal model of "E" and the global
       Tamagawa number "c". Here "E" is an elliptic curve given by a medium or long vector of the
       type given by "ellinit", and is supposed to have all its coefficients "a_i" in Q. The
       result is a 3 component vector "[N,v,c]". "N" is the arithmetic conductor of the curve,
       "v" is itself a vector "[u,r,s,t]" with rational components. It gives a coordinate change
       for "E" over Q such that the resulting model has integral coefficients, is everywhere
       minimal, "a_1" is 0 or 1, "a_2" is 0, 1 or "-1" and "a_3" is 0 or 1. Such a model is
       unique, and the vector "v" is unique if we specify that "u" is positive. To get the new
       model, simply type "ellchangecurve(E,v)". Finally "c" is the product of the local Tamagawa
       numbers "c_p", a quantity which enters in the Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture.

       The library syntax is globalreduction"(E)".

   ellheight"(E,z,{flag = 0})"
       global Neron-Tate height of the point "z" on the elliptic curve "E". The vector "E" must
       be a long vector of the type given by "ellinit", with "flag = 1". If "flag = 0", this
       computation is done using sigma and theta-functions and a trick due to J.  Silverman. If
       "flag = 1", use Tate's "4^n" algorithm, which is much slower.  "E" is assumed to be
       integral, given by a minimal model.

       The library syntax is ellheight0"(E,z,flag,prec)". The Archimedean contribution alone is
       given by the library function "hell(E,z,prec)".  Also available are "ghell(E,z,prec)"
       ("flag = 0") and "ghell2(E,z,prec)" ("flag = 1").

   ellheightmatrix"(E,x)"
       "x" being a vector of points, this function outputs the Gram matrix of "x" with respect to
       the Neron-Tate height, in other words, the "(i,j)" component of the matrix is equal to
       "ellbil(E,x[i],x[j])". The rank of this matrix, at least in some approximate sense, gives
       the rank of the set of points, and if "x" is a basis of the Mordell-Weil group of "E", its
       determinant is equal to the regulator of "E". Note that this matrix should be divided by 2
       to be in accordance with certain normalizations. "E" is assumed to be integral, given by a
       minimal model.

       The library syntax is mathell"(E,x,prec)".

   ellinit"(E,{flag = 0})"
       computes some fixed data concerning the elliptic curve given by the five-component vector
       "E", which will be essential for most further computations on the curve. The result is a
       19-component vector E (called a long vector in this section), shortened to 13 components
       (medium vector) if "flag = 1". Both contain the following information in the first 13
       components:

         " a_1,a_2,a_3,a_4,a_6,b_2,b_4,b_6,b_8,c_4,c_6,Delta,j."

       In particular, the discriminant is "E[12]" (or "E.disc"), and the "j"-invariant is "E[13]"
       (or "E.j").

       The other six components are only present if "flag" is 0 (or omitted!).  Their content
       depends on whether the curve is defined over R or not:

       "*" When "E" is defined over R, "E[14]" ("E.roots") is a vector whose three components
       contain the roots of the associated Weierstrass equation. If the roots are all real, then
       they are ordered by decreasing value. If only one is real, it is the first component of
       "E[14]".

       "E[15]" ("E.omega[1]") is the real period of "E" (integral of "dx/(2y+a_1x+a_3)" over the
       connected component of the identity element of the real points of the curve), and "E[16]"
       ("E.omega[2]") is a complex period. In other words, "omega_1 = E[15]" and "omega_2 =
       E[16]" form a basis of the complex lattice defining "E" ("E.omega"), with "tau =
       (omega_2)/(omega_1)" having positive imaginary part.

       "E[17]" and "E[18]" are the corresponding values "eta_1" and "eta_2" such that
       "eta_1omega_2-eta_2omega_1 = iPi", and both can be retrieved by typing "E.eta" (as a row
       vector whose components are the "eta_i").

       Finally, "E[19]" ("E.area") is the volume of the complex lattice defining "E".

       "*" When "E" is defined over "Q_p", the "p"-adic valuation of "j" must be negative. Then
       "E[14]" ("E.roots") is the vector with a single component equal to the "p"-adic root of
       the associated Weierstrass equation corresponding to "-1" under the Tate parametrization.

       "E[15]" is equal to the square of the "u"-value, in the notation of Tate.

       "E[16]" is the "u"-value itself, if it belongs to "Q_p", otherwise zero.

       "E[17]" is the value of Tate's "q" for the curve "E".

       "E.tate" will yield the three-component vector "[u^2,u,q]".

       "E[18]" ("E.w") is the value of Mestre's "w" (this is technical), and "E[19]" is
       arbitrarily set equal to zero.

       For all other base fields or rings, the last six components are arbitrarily set equal to
       zero (see also the description of member functions related to elliptic curves at the
       beginning of this section).

       The library syntax is ellinit0"(E,flag,prec)". Also available are "initell(E,prec)" ("flag
       = 0") and "smallinitell(E,prec)" ("flag = 1").

   ellisoncurve"(E,z)"
       gives 1 (i.e. true) if the point "z" is on the elliptic curve "E", 0 otherwise. If "E" or
       "z" have imprecise coefficients, an attempt is made to take this into account, i.e. an
       imprecise equality is checked, not a precise one.

       The library syntax is oncurve"(E,z)", and the result is a "long".

   ellj"(x)"
       elliptic "j"-invariant. "x" must be a complex number with positive imaginary part, or
       convertible into a power series or a "p"-adic number with positive valuation.

       The library syntax is jell"(x,prec)".

   elllocalred"(E,p)"
       calculates the Kodaira type of the local fiber of the elliptic curve "E" at the prime "p".
       "E" must be given by a medium or long vector of the type given by "ellinit", and is
       assumed to have all its coefficients "a_i" in Z. The result is a 4-component vector
       "[f,kod,v,c]". Here "f" is the exponent of "p" in the arithmetic conductor of "E", and
       "kod" is the Kodaira type which is coded as follows:

       1 means good reduction (type I"_0"), 2, 3 and 4 mean types II, III and IV respectively,
       "4+nu" with "nu > 0" means type I"_nu"; finally the opposite values "-1", "-2", etc. refer
       to the starred types I"_0^*", II"^*", etc. The third component "v" is itself a vector
       "[u,r,s,t]" giving the coordinate changes done during the local reduction. Normally, this
       has no use if "u" is 1, that is, if the given equation was already minimal.  Finally, the
       last component "c" is the local Tamagawa number "c_p".

       The library syntax is localreduction"(E,p)".

   elllseries"(E,s,{A = 1})"
       "E" being a medium or long vector given by "ellinit", this computes the value of the
       L-series of "E" at "s". It is assumed that "E" is a minimal model over Z and that the
       curve is a modular elliptic curve. The optional parameter "A" is a cutoff point for the
       integral, which must be chosen close to 1 for best speed. The result must be independent
       of "A", so this allows some internal checking of the function.

       Note that if the conductor of the curve is large, say greater than "10^{12}", this
       function will take an unreasonable amount of time since it uses an "O(N^{1/2})" algorithm.

       The library syntax is lseriesell"(E,s,A,prec)" where "prec" is a "long" and an omitted "A"
       is coded as "NULL".

   ellorder"(E,z)"
       gives the order of the point "z" on the elliptic curve "E" if it is a torsion point, zero
       otherwise. In the present version 2.2.0, this is implemented only for elliptic curves
       defined over Q.

       The library syntax is orderell"(E,z)".

   ellordinate"(E,x)"
       gives a 0, 1 or 2-component vector containing the "y"-coordinates of the points of the
       curve "E" having "x" as "x"-coordinate.

       The library syntax is ordell"(E,x)".

   ellpointtoz"(E,z)"
       if "E" is an elliptic curve with coefficients in R, this computes a complex number "t"
       (modulo the lattice defining "E") corresponding to the point "z", i.e. such that, in the
       standard Weierstrass model, " wp (t) = z[1], wp '(t) = z[2]". In other words, this is the
       inverse function of "ellztopoint".

       If "E" has coefficients in "Q_p", then either Tate's "u" is in "Q_p", in which case the
       output is a "p"-adic number "t" corresponding to the point "z" under the Tate
       parametrization, or only its square is, in which case the output is "t+1/t". "E" must be a
       long vector output by "ellinit".

       The library syntax is zell"(E,z,prec)".

   ellpow"(E,z,n)"
       computes "n" times the point "z" for the group law on the elliptic curve "E". Here, "n"
       can be in Z, or "n" can be a complex quadratic integer if the curve "E" has complex
       multiplication by "n" (if not, an error message is issued).

       The library syntax is powell"(E,z,n)".

   ellrootno"(E,{p = 1})"
       "E" being a medium or long vector given by "ellinit", this computes the local (if "p ! =
       1") or global (if "p = 1") root number of the L-series of the elliptic curve "E". Note
       that the global root number is the sign of the functional equation and conjecturally is
       the parity of the rank of the Mordell-Weil group.  The equation for "E" must have
       coefficients in Q but need not be minimal.

       The library syntax is ellrootno"(E,p)" and the result (equal to "+-1") is a "long".

   ellsigma"(E,z,{flag = 0})"
       value of the Weierstrass "sigma" function of the lattice associated to "E" as given by
       "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be given as a lattice "[omega_1,omega_2]").

       If "flag = 1", computes an (arbitrary) determination of " log (sigma(z))".

       If "flag = 2,3", same using the product expansion instead of theta series.  The library
       syntax is ellsigma"(E,z,flag)"

   ellsub"(E,z1,z2)"
       difference of the points "z1" and "z2" on the elliptic curve corresponding to the vector
       "E".

       The library syntax is subell"(E,z1,z2)".

   elltaniyama"(E)"
       computes the modular parametrization of the elliptic curve "E", where "E" is given in the
       (long or medium) format output by "ellinit", in the form of a two-component vector "[u,v]"
       of power series, given to the current default series precision. This vector is
       characterized by the following two properties. First the point "(x,y) = (u,v)" satisfies
       the equation of the elliptic curve. Second, the differential "du/(2v+a_1u+a_3)" is equal
       to "f(z)dz", a differential form on "H/Gamma_0(N)" where "N" is the conductor of the
       curve. The variable used in the power series for "u" and "v" is "x", which is implicitly
       understood to be equal to " exp (2iPi z)". It is assumed that the curve is a strong Weil
       curve, and the Manin constant is equal to 1. The equation of the curve "E" must be minimal
       (use "ellglobalred" to get a minimal equation).

       The library syntax is taniyama"(E)", and the precision of the result is determined by the
       global variable "precdl".

   elltors"(E,{flag = 0})"
       if "E" is an elliptic curve defined over Q, outputs the torsion subgroup of "E" as a
       3-component vector "[t,v1,v2]", where "t" is the order of the torsion group, "v1" gives
       the structure of the torsion group as a product of cyclic groups (sorted by decreasing
       order), and "v2" gives generators for these cyclic groups. "E" must be a long vector as
       output by "ellinit".

         ?  E = ellinit([0,0,0,-1,0]);
         ?  elltors(E)
         %1 = [4, [2, 2], [[0, 0], [1, 0]]]

       Here, the torsion subgroup is isomorphic to "Z/2Z  x Z/2Z", with generators "[0,0]" and
       "[1,0]".

       If "flag = 0", use Doud's algorithm : bound torsion by computing "#E(F_p)" for small
       primes of good reduction, then look for torsion points using Weierstrass parametrization
       (and Mazur's classification).

       If "flag = 1", use Lutz--Nagell (much slower), "E" is allowed to be a medium vector.

       The library syntax is elltors0"(E,flag)".

   ellwp"(E,{z = x},{flag = 0})"
       Computes the value at "z" of the Weierstrass " wp " function attached to the elliptic
       curve "E" as given by "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be given as a lattice
       "[omega_1,omega_2]").

       If "z" is omitted or is a simple variable, computes the power series expansion in "z"
       (starting "z^{-2}+O(z^2)"). The number of terms to an even power in the expansion is the
       default serieslength in GP, and the second argument (C long integer) in library mode.

       Optional flag is (for now) only taken into account when "z" is numeric, and means 0:
       compute only " wp (z)", 1: compute "[ wp (z), wp '(z)]".

       The library syntax is ellwp0"(E,z,flag,prec,precdl)". Also available is
       weipell"(E,precdl)" for the power series (in "x = polx[0]").

   ellzeta"(E,z)"
       value of the Weierstrass "zeta" function of the lattice associated to "E" as given by
       "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be given as a lattice "[omega_1,omega_2]").

       The library syntax is ellzeta"(E,z)".

   ellztopoint"(E,z)"
       "E" being a long vector, computes the coordinates "[x,y]" on the curve "E" corresponding
       to the complex number "z".  Hence this is the inverse function of "ellpointtoz". In other
       words, if the curve is put in Weierstrass form, "[x,y]" represents the Weierstrass " wp
       "-function and its derivative.  If "z" is in the lattice defining "E" over C, the result
       is the point at infinity "[0]".

       The library syntax is pointell"(E,z,prec)".

Functions related to general number fields
       In this section can be found functions which are used almost exclusively for working in
       general number fields. Other less specific functions can be found in the next section on
       polynomials. Functions related to quadratic number fields can be found in the section
       "Label se:arithmetic" (Arithmetic functions).

       We shall use the following conventions:

       "*" "nf" denotes a number field, i.e. a 9-component vector in the format output by
       "nfinit". This contains the basic arithmetic data associated to the number field:
       signature, maximal order, discriminant, etc.

       "*" "bnf" denotes a big number field, i.e. a 10-component vector in the format output by
       "bnfinit". This contains "nf" and the deeper invariants of the field: units, class groups,
       as well as a lot of technical data necessary for some complex fonctions like
       "bnfisprincipal".

       "*" "bnr" denotes a big ``ray number field'', i.e. some data structure output by
       "bnrinit", even more complicated than "bnf", corresponding to the ray class group
       structure of the field, for some modulus.

       "*" "rnf" denotes a relative number field (see below).

       "*" "ideal" can mean any of the following:

         -- a Z-basis, in Hermite normal form (HNF) or not. In this case "x" is a square matrix.

         -- an idele, i.e. a 2-component vector, the first being an ideal given as a Z--basis,
       the second being a "r_1+r_2"-component row vector giving the complex logarithmic
       Archimedean information.

         -- a "Z_K"-generating system for an ideal.

         -- a column vector "x" expressing an element of the number field on the integral basis,
       in which case the ideal is treated as being the principal idele (or ideal) generated by
       "x".

         -- a prime ideal, i.e. a 5-component vector in the format output by "idealprimedec".

         -- a polmod "x", i.e. an algebraic integer, in which case the ideal is treated as being
       the principal idele generated by "x".

         -- an integer or a rational number, also treated as a principal idele.

       "*" a {character} on the Abelian group "\bigoplus (Z/N_iZ) g_i" is given by a row vector
       "chi = [a_1,...,a_n]" such that "chi(prod g_i^{n_i}) = exp(2iPisum a_i n_i / N_i)".

       Warnings:

       1) An element in "nf" can be expressed either as a polmod or as a vector of components on
       the integral basis "nf.zk". It is absolutely essential that all such vectors be column
       vectors.

       2) When giving an ideal by a "Z_K" generating system to a function expecting an ideal, it
       must be ensured that the function understands that it is a "Z_K"-generating system and not
       a Z-generating system. When the number of generators is strictly less than the degree of
       the field, there is no ambiguity and the program assumes that one is giving a
       "Z_K"-generating set.  When the number of generators is greater than or equal to the
       degree of the field, however, the program assumes on the contrary that you are giving a
       Z-generating set. If this is not the case, you must absolutely change it into a
       Z-generating set, the simplest manner being to use "idealhnf(nf,x)".

       Concerning relative extensions, some additional definitions are necessary.

       "*" A {relative matrix} will be a matrix whose entries are elements of a (given) number
       field "nf", always expressed as column vectors on the integral basis "nf.zk". Hence it is
       a matrix of vectors.

       "*" An ideal list will be a row vector of (fractional) ideals of the number field "nf".

       "*" A pseudo-matrix will be a pair "(A,I)" where "A" is a relative matrix and "I" an ideal
       list whose length is the same as the number of columns of "A". This pair will be
       represented by a 2-component row vector.

       "*" The module generated by a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" is the sum "sum_i{a}_jA_j" where the
       "{a}_j" are the ideals of "I" and "A_j" is the "j"-th column of "A".

       "*" A pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" is a pseudo-basis of the module it generates if "A" is a
       square matrix with non-zero determinant and all the ideals of "I" are non-zero. We say
       that it is in Hermite Normal Form (HNF) if it is upper triangular and all the elements of
       the diagonal are equal to 1.

       "*" The determinant of a pseudo-basis "(A,I)" is the ideal equal to the product of the
       determinant of "A" by all the ideals of "I". The determinant of a pseudo-matrix is the
       determinant of any pseudo-basis of the module it generates.

       Finally, when defining a relative extension, the base field should be defined by a
       variable having a lower priority (i.e. a higher number) than the variable defining the
       extension. For example, under GP you can use the variable name "y" (or "t") to define the
       base field, and the variable name "x" to define the relative extension.

       Now a last set of definitions concerning the way big ray number fields (or bnr) are input,
       using class field theory.  These are defined by a triple "a1", "a2", "a3", where the
       defining set "[a1,a2,a3]" can have any of the following forms: "[bnr]", "[bnr,subgroup]",
       "[bnf,module]", "[bnf,module,subgroup]", where:

       "*" "bnf" is as output by "bnfclassunit" or "bnfinit", where units are mandatory unless
       the ideal is trivial; bnr by "bnrclass" (with "flag > 0") or "bnrinit". This is the ground
       field.

       "*" module is either an ideal in any form (see above) or a two-component row vector
       containing an ideal and an "r_1"-component row vector of flags indicating which real
       Archimedean embeddings to take in the module.

       "*" subgroup is the HNF matrix of a subgroup of the ray class group of the ground field
       for the modulus module. This is input as a square matrix expressing generators of a
       subgroup of the ray class group "bnr.clgp" on the given generators.

       The corresponding bnr is then the subfield of the ray class field of the ground field for
       the given modulus, associated to the given subgroup.

       All the functions which are specific to relative extensions, number fields, big number
       fields, big number rays, share the prefix "rnf", "nf", "bnf", "bnr" respectively. They are
       meant to take as first argument a number field of that precise type, respectively output
       by "rnfinit", "nfinit", "bnfinit", and "bnrinit".

       However, and even though it may not be specified in the descriptions of the functions
       below, it is permissible, if the function expects a "nf", to use a "bnf" instead (which
       contains much more information). The program will make the effort of converting to what it
       needs. On the other hand, if the program requires a big number field, the program will not
       launch "bnfinit" for you, which can be a costly operation. Instead, it will give you a
       specific error message.

       The data types corresponding to the structures described above are rather complicated.
       Thus, as we already have seen it with elliptic curves, GP provides you with some ``member
       functions'' to retrieve the data you need from these structures (once they have been
       initialized of course). The relevant types of number fields are indicated between
       parentheses:


        "bnf"     (bnr,  bnf ) :   big number field.

        "clgp"   (bnr,  bnf ) :   classgroup. This one admits the following three subclasses:

                "cyc"  :     cyclic decomposition (SNF).

                "gen"  : generators.

                "no"   :     number of elements.

        "diff"   (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   the different ideal.

        "codiff" (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   the codifferent (inverse of the different in the ideal
       group).

        "disc"  (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   discriminant.

        "fu"    (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) : fundamental units.

        "futu"  (bnr,  bnf ) :   "[u,w]", "u" is a vector of fundamental units, "w" generates the
       torsion.

        "nf"    (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   number field.

        "reg"   (bnr,  bnf, ) :   regulator.

        "roots" (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   roots of the polnomial generating the field.

        "sign"  (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   "[r_1,r_2]" the signature of the field. This means that the
       field has "r_1" real      embeddings, "2r_2" complex ones.

        "t2"    (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   the T2 matrix (see "nfinit").

        "tu"    (bnr,  bnf, ) :   a generator for the torsion units.

        "tufu"  (bnr,  bnf, ) :   as "futu", but outputs "[w,u]".

        "zk"    (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   integral basis, i.e. a Z-basis of the maximal order.

        "zkst"  (bnr           ) :   structure of "(Z_K/m)^*" (can be extracted also from an
       idealstar).

       For instance, assume that "bnf = bnfinit(pol)", for some polynomial. Then "bnf.clgp"
       retrieves the class group, and "bnf.clgp.no" the class number. If we had set "bnf =
       nfinit(pol)", both would have output an error message. All these functions are completely
       recursive, thus for instance "bnr.bnf.nf.zk" will yield the maximal order of bnr (which
       you could get directly with a simple "bnr.zk" of course).

       The following functions, starting with "buch" in library mode, and with "bnf" under GP,
       are implementations of the sub-exponential algorithms for finding class and unit groups
       under GRH, due to Hafner-McCurley, Buchmann and Cohen-Diaz-Olivier.

       The general call to the functions concerning class groups of general number fields
       (i.e. excluding "quadclassunit") involves a polynomial "P" and a technical vector

         "tech = [c,c2,nrel,borne,nrpid,minsfb],"

       where the parameters are to be understood as follows:

       "P" is the defining polynomial for the number field, which must be in "Z[X]", irreducible
       and, preferably, monic. In fact, if you supply a non-monic polynomial at this point, GP
       will issue a warning, then transform your polynomial so that it becomes monic. Instead of
       the normal result, say "res", you then get a vector "[res,Mod(a,Q)]", where "Mod(a,Q) =
       Mod(X,P)" gives the change of variables.

       The numbers "c" and "c2" are positive real numbers which control the execution time and
       the stack size. To get maximum speed, set "c2 = c". To get a rigorous result (under GRH)
       you must take "c2 = 12" (or "c2 = 6" in the quadratic case, but then you should use the
       much faster function "quadclassunit"). Reasonable values for "c" are between 0.1 and 2.
       (The defaults are "c = c2 = 0.3").

       "nrel" is the number of initial extra relations requested in computing the relation
       matrix. Reasonable values are between 5 and 20. (The default is 5).

       "borne" is a multiplicative coefficient of the Minkowski bound which controls the search
       for small norm relations. If this parameter is set equal to 0, the program does not search
       for small norm relations. Otherwise reasonable values are between 0.5 and 2.0. (The
       default is 1.0).

       "nrpid" is the maximal number of small norm relations associated to each ideal in the
       factor base. Irrelevant when "borne = 0". Otherwise, reasonable values are between 4 and
       20. (The default is 4).

       "minsfb" is the minimal number of elements in the ``sub-factorbase''.  If the program does
       not seem to succeed in finding a full rank matrix (which you can see in GP by typing "\g
       2"), increase this number. Reasonable values are between 2 and 5. (The default is 3).

       Remarks.

       Apart from the polynomial "P", you don't need to supply any of the technical parameters
       (under the library you still need to send at least an empty vector, "cgetg(1,t_VEC)").
       However, should you choose to set some of them, they must be given in the requested order.
       For example, if you want to specify a given value of "nrel", you must give some values as
       well for "c" and "c2", and provide a vector "[c,c2,nrel]".

       Note also that you can use an "nf" instead of "P", which avoids recomputing the integral
       basis and analogous quantities.

   bnfcertify"(bnf)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" or "bnfclassunit", checks whether
       the result is correct, i.e. whether it is possible to remove the assumption of the
       Generalized Riemann Hypothesis. If it is correct, the answer is 1.  If not, the program
       may output some error message, but more probably will loop indefinitely. In no occasion
       can the program give a wrong answer (barring bugs of course): if the program answers 1,
       the answer is certified.

       The library syntax is certifybuchall"(bnf)", and the result is a C long.

   bnfclassunit"(P,{flag = 0},{tech = []})"
       Buchmann's sub-exponential algorithm for computing the class group, the regulator and a
       system of fundamental units of the general algebraic number field "K" defined by the
       irreducible polynomial "P" with integer coefficients.

       The result of this function is a vector "v" with 10 components (it is not a "bnf", you
       need "bnfinit" for that), which for ease of presentation is in fact output as a one column
       matrix. First we describe the default behaviour ("flag = 0"):

       "v[1]" is equal to the polynomial "P". Note that for optimum performance, "P" should have
       gone through "polred" or "nfinit(x,2)".

       "v[2]" is the 2-component vector "[r1,r2]", where "r1" and "r2" are as usual the number of
       real and half the number of complex embeddings of the number field "K".

       "v[3]" is the 2-component vector containing the field discriminant and the index.

       "v[4]" is an integral basis in Hermite normal form.

       "v[5]" ("v.clgp") is a 3-component vector containing the class number ("v.clgp.no"), the
       structure of the class group as a product of cyclic groups of order "n_i" ("v.clgp.cyc"),
       and the corresponding generators of the class group of respective orders "n_i"
       ("v.clgp.gen").

       "v[6]" ("v.reg") is the regulator computed to an accuracy which is the maximum of an
       internally determined accuracy and of the default.

       "v[7]" is a measure of the correctness of the result. If it is close to 1, the results are
       correct (under GRH). If it is close to a larger integer, this shows that the product of
       the class number by the regulator is off by a factor equal to this integer, and you must
       start again with a larger value for "c" or a different random seed, i.e. use the function
       "setrand".  (Since the computation involves a random process, starting again with exactly
       the same parameters may give the correct result.) In this case a warning message is
       printed.

       "v[8]" ("v.tu") a vector with 2 components, the first being the number "w" of roots of
       unity in "K" and the second a primitive "w"-th root of unity expressed as a polynomial.

       "v[9]" ("v.fu") is a system of fundamental units also expressed as polynomials.

       "v[10]" gives a measure of the correctness of the computations of the fundamental units
       (not of the regulator), expressed as a number of bits. If this number is greater than 20,
       say, everything is OK. If "v[10] <= 0", then we have lost all accuracy in computing the
       units (usually an error message will be printed and the units not given). In the
       intermediate cases, one must proceed with caution (for example by increasing the current
       precision).

       If "flag = 1", and the precision happens to be insufficient for obtaining the fundamental
       units exactly, the internal precision is doubled and the computation redone, until the
       exact results are obtained. The user should be warned that this can take a very long time
       when the coefficients of the fundamental units on the integral basis are very large, for
       example in the case of large real quadratic fields. In that case, there are alternate
       methods for representing algebraic numbers which are not implemented in PARI.

       If "flag = 2", the fundamental units and roots of unity are not computed.  Hence the
       result has only 7 components, the first seven ones.

       "tech" is a technical vector (empty by default) containing "c", "c2", nrel, borne, nbpid,
       minsfb, in this order (see the beginning of the section or the keyword "bnf").  You can
       supply any number of these provided you give an actual value to each of them (the ``empty
       arg'' trick won't work here). Careful use of these parameters may speed up your
       computations considerably.

       The library syntax is bnfclassunit0"(P,flag,tech,prec)".

   bnfclgp"(P,{tech = []})"
       as "bnfclassunit", but only outputs "v[5]", i.e. the class group.

       The library syntax is bnfclassgrouponly"(P,tech,prec)", where tech is as described under
       "bnfclassunit".

   bnfdecodemodule"(nf,m)"
       if "m" is a module as output in the first component of an extension given by
       "bnrdisclist", outputs the true module.

       The library syntax is decodemodule"(nf,m)".

   bnfinit"(P,{flag = 0},{tech = []})"
       essentially identical to "bnfclassunit" except that the output contains a lot of technical
       data, and should not be printed out explicitly in general. The result of "bnfinit" is used
       in programs such as "bnfisprincipal", "bnfisunit" or "bnfnarrow". The result is a
       10-component vector "bnf".

       "*" The first 6 and last 2 components are technical and in principle are not used by the
       casual user. However, for the sake of completeness, their description is as follows. We
       use the notations explained in the book by H. Cohen, A Course in Computational Algebraic
       Number Theory, Graduate Texts in Maths 138, Springer-Verlag, 1993, Section 6.5, and
       subsection 6.5.5 in particular.

       "bnf[1]" contains the matrix "W", i.e. the matrix in Hermite normal form giving relations
       for the class group on prime ideal generators "(p_i)_{1 <= i <= r}".

       "bnf[2]" contains the matrix "B", i.e. the matrix containing the expressions of the prime
       ideal factorbase in terms of the "p_i". It is an "r x c" matrix.

       "bnf[3]" contains the complex logarithmic embeddings of the system of fundamental units
       which has been found. It is an "(r_1+r_2) x (r_1+r_2-1)" matrix.

       "bnf[4]" contains the matrix "M''_C" of Archimedean components of the relations of the
       matrix "(W|B)".

       "bnf[5]" contains the prime factor base, i.e. the list of prime ideals used in finding the
       relations.

       "bnf[6]" contains the permutation of the prime factor base which was necessary to reduce
       the relation matrix to the form explained in subsection 6.5.5 of GTM 138 (i.e. with a big
       "c x c" identity matrix on the lower right). Note that in the above mentioned book, the
       need to permute the rows of the relation matrices which occur was not emphasized.

       "bnf[9]" is a 3-element row vector used in "bnfisprincipal" only and obtained as follows.
       Let "D = U W V" obtained by applying the Smith normal form algorithm to the matrix "W" ( =
       "bnf[1]") and let "U_r" be the reduction of "U" modulo "D". The first elements of the
       factorbase are given (in terms of "bnf.gen") by the columns of "U_r", with archimedian
       component "g_a"; let also "GD_a" be the archimedian components of the generators of the
       (principal) ideals defined by the "bnf.gen[i]^bnf.cyc[i]". Then "bnf[9] = [U_r, g_a,
       GD_a]".

       Finally, "bnf[10]" is by default unused and set equal to 0. This field is used to store
       further information about the field as it becomes available (which is rarely needed, hence
       would be too expensive to compute during the initial "bnfinit" call). For instance, the
       generators of the principal ideals "bnf.gen[i]^bnf.cyc[i]" (during a call to
       "bnrisprincipal"), or those corresponding to the relations in "W" and "B" (when the "bnf"
       internal precision needs to be increased).

       "*" The less technical components are as follows:

       "bnf[7]" or "bnf.nf" is equal to the number field data "nf" as would be given by "nfinit".

       "bnf[8]" is a vector containing the last 6 components of "bnfclassunit[,1]", i.e. the
       classgroup "bnf.clgp", the regulator "bnf.reg", the general ``check'' number which should
       be close to 1, the number of roots of unity and a generator "bnf.tu", the fundamental
       units "bnf.fu", and finally the check on their computation. If the precision becomes
       insufficient, GP outputs a warning ("fundamental units too large, not given") and does not
       strive to compute the units by default ("flag = 0").

       When "flag = 1", GP insists on finding the fundamental units exactly, the internal
       precision being doubled and the computation redone, until the exact results are obtained.
       The user should be warned that this can take a very long time when the coefficients of the
       fundamental units on the integral basis are very large.

       When "flag = 2", on the contrary, it is initially agreed that GP will not compute units.

       When "flag = 3", computes a very small version of "bnfinit", a ``small big number field''
       (or sbnf for short) which contains enough information to recover the full "bnf" vector
       very rapidly, but which is much smaller and hence easy to store and print. It is supposed
       to be used in conjunction with "bnfmake". The output is a 12 component vector "v", as
       follows. Let "bnf" be the result of a full "bnfinit", complete with units. Then "v[1]" is
       the polynomial "P", "v[2]" is the number of real embeddings "r_1", "v[3]" is the field
       discriminant, "v[4]" is the integral basis, "v[5]" is the list of roots as in the sixth
       component of "nfinit", "v[6]" is the matrix "MD" of "nfinit" giving a Z-basis of the
       different, "v[7]" is the matrix "W = bnf[1]", "v[8]" is the matrix "matalpha = bnf[2]",
       "v[9]" is the prime ideal factor base "bnf[5]" coded in a compact way, and ordered
       according to the permutation "bnf[6]", "v[10]" is the 2-component vector giving the number
       of roots of unity and a generator, expressed on the integral basis, "v[11]" is the list of
       fundamental units, expressed on the integral basis, "v[12]" is a vector containing the
       algebraic numbers alpha corresponding to the columns of the matrix "matalpha", expressed
       on the integral basis.

       Note that all the components are exact (integral or rational), except for the roots in
       "v[5]". In practice, this is the only component which a user is allowed to modify, by
       recomputing the roots to a higher accuracy if desired. Note also that the member functions
       will not work on sbnf, you have to use "bnfmake" explicitly first.

       The library syntax is bnfinit0"(P,flag,tech,prec)".

   bnfisintnorm"(bnf,x)"
       computes a complete system of solutions (modulo units of positive norm) of the absolute
       norm equation "Norm(a) = x", where "a" is an integer in "bnf". If "bnf" has not been
       certified, the correctness of the result depends on the validity of GRH.

       The library syntax is bnfisintnorm"(bnf,x)".

   bnfisnorm"(bnf,x,{flag = 1})"
       tries to tell whether the rational number "x" is the norm of some element y in "bnf".
       Returns a vector "[a,b]" where "x = Norm(a)*b". Looks for a solution which is an "S"-unit,
       with "S" a certain set of prime ideals containing (among others) all primes dividing "x".
       If "bnf" is known to be Galois, set "flag = 0" (in this case, "x" is a norm iff "b = 1").
       If "flag" is non zero the program adds to "S" the following prime ideals, depending on the
       sign of "flag". If "flag > 0", the ideals of norm less than "flag". And if "flag < 0" the
       ideals dividing "flag".

       If you are willing to assume GRH, the answer is guaranteed (i.e. "x" is a norm iff "b =
       1"), if "S" contains all primes less than "12 log (disc(Bnf))^2", where "Bnf" is the
       Galois closure of "bnf".

       The library syntax is bnfisnorm"(bnf,x,flag,prec)", where "flag" and "prec" are "long"s.

   bnfissunit"(bnf,sfu,x)"
       "bnf" being output by "bnfinit", sfu by "bnfsunit", gives the column vector of exponents
       of "x" on the fundamental "S"-units and the roots of unity.  If "x" is not a unit, outputs
       an empty vector.

       The library syntax is bnfissunit"(bnf,sfu,x)".

   bnfisprincipal"(bnf,x,{flag = 1})"
       "bnf" being the number field data output by "bnfinit", and "x" being either a Z-basis of
       an ideal in the number field (not necessarily in HNF) or a prime ideal in the format
       output by the function "idealprimedec", this function tests whether the ideal is principal
       or not. The result is more complete than a simple true/false answer: it gives a row vector
       "[v_1,v_2,check]", where

       "v_1" is the vector of components "c_i" of the class of the ideal "x" in the class group,
       expressed on the generators "g_i" given by "bnfinit" (specifically "bnf.clgp.gen" which is
       the same as "bnf[8][1][3]"). The "c_i" are chosen so that "0 <= c_i < n_i" where "n_i" is
       the order of "g_i" (the vector of "n_i" being "bnf.clgp.cyc", that is "bnf[8][1][2]").

       "v_2" gives on the integral basis the components of "alpha" such that "x =
       alphaprod_ig_i^{c_i}". In particular, "x" is principal if and only if "v_1" is equal to
       the zero vector, and if this the case "x = alphaZ_K" where "alpha" is given by "v_2". Note
       that if "alpha" is too large to be given, a warning message will be printed and "v_2" will
       be set equal to the empty vector.

       Finally the third component check is analogous to the last component of "bnfclassunit": it
       gives a check on the accuracy of the result, in bits.  check should be at least 10, and
       preferably much more. In any case, the result is checked for correctness.

       If "flag = 0", outputs only "v_1", which is much easier to compute.

       If "flag = 2", does as if "flag" were 0, but doubles the precision until a result is
       obtained.

       If "flag = 3", as in the default behaviour ("flag = 1"), but doubles the precision until a
       result is obtained.

       The user is warned that these two last setting may induce very lengthy computations.

       The library syntax is isprincipalall"(bnf,x,flag)".

   bnfisunit"(bnf,x)"
       "bnf" being the number field data output by "bnfinit" and "x" being an algebraic number
       (type integer, rational or polmod), this outputs the decomposition of "x" on the
       fundamental units and the roots of unity if "x" is a unit, the empty vector otherwise.
       More precisely, if "u_1",...,"u_r" are the fundamental units, and "zeta" is the generator
       of the group of roots of unity (found by "bnfclassunit" or "bnfinit"), the output is a
       vector "[x_1,...,x_r,x_{r+1}]" such that "x = u_1^{x_1}...u_r^{x_r}.zeta^{x_{r+1}}". The
       "x_i" are integers for "i <= r" and is an integer modulo the order of "zeta" for "i =
       r+1".

       The library syntax is isunit"(bnf,x)".

   bnfmake"(sbnf)"
       sbnf being a ``small "bnf"'' as output by "bnfinit""(x,3)", computes the complete
       "bnfinit" information. The result is not identical to what "bnfinit" would yield, but is
       functionally identical. The execution time is very small compared to a complete "bnfinit".
       Note that if the default precision in GP (or "prec" in library mode) is greater than the
       precision of the roots "sbnf[5]", these are recomputed so as to get a result with greater
       accuracy.

       Note that the member functions are not available for sbnf, you have to use "bnfmake"
       explicitly first.

       The library syntax is makebigbnf"(sbnf,prec)", where "prec" is a C long integer.

   bnfnarrow"(bnf)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", computes the narrow class group of
       "bnf". The output is a 3-component row vector "v" analogous to the corresponding class
       group component "bnf.clgp" ("bnf[8][1]"): the first component is the narrow class number
       "v.no", the second component is a vector containing the SNF cyclic components "v.cyc" of
       the narrow class group, and the third is a vector giving the generators of the
       corresponding "v.gen" cyclic groups. Note that this function is a special case of
       "bnrclass".

       The library syntax is buchnarrow"(bnf)".

   bnfsignunit"(bnf)"
       "bnf" being a big number field output by "bnfinit", this computes an "r_1 x (r_1+r_2-1)"
       matrix having "+-1" components, giving the signs of the real embeddings of the fundamental
       units.

       The library syntax is signunits"(bnf)".

   bnfreg"(bnf)"
       "bnf" being a big number field output by "bnfinit", computes its regulator.

       The library syntax is regulator"(bnf,tech,prec)", where tech is as in "bnfclassunit".

   bnfsunit"(bnf,S)"
       computes the fundamental "S"-units of the number field "bnf" (output by "bnfinit"), where
       "S" is a list of prime ideals (output by "idealprimedec"). The output is a vector "v" with
       6 components.

       "v[1]" gives a minimal system of (integral) generators of the "S"-unit group modulo the
       unit group.

       "v[2]" contains technical data needed by "bnfissunit".

       "v[3]" is an empty vector (used to give the logarithmic embeddings of the generators in
       "v[1]" in version 2.0.16).

       "v[4]" is the "S"-regulator (this is the product of the regulator, the determinant of
       "v[2]" and the natural logarithms of the norms of the ideals in "S").

       "v[5]" gives the "S"-class group structure, in the usual format (a row vector whose three
       components give in order the "S"-class number, the cyclic components and the generators).

       "v[6]" is a copy of "S".

       The library syntax is bnfsunit"(bnf,S,prec)".

   bnfunit"(bnf)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", outputs a two-component row vector
       giving in the first component the vector of fundamental units of the number field, and in
       the second component the number of bit of accuracy which remained in the computation
       (which is always correct, otherwise an error message is printed).  This function is mainly
       for people who used the wrong flag in "bnfinit" and would like to skip part of a lengthy
       "bnfinit" computation.

       The library syntax is buchfu"(bnf)".

   bnrL1"(bnr,subgroup,{flag = 0})"
       bnr being the number field data which is output by "bnrinit(,,1)" and subgroup being a
       square matrix defining a congruence subgroup of the ray class group corresponding to bnr
       (or 0 for the trivial congruence subgroup), returns for each character "chi" of the ray
       class group which is trivial on this subgroup, the value at "s = 1" (or "s = 0") of the
       abelian "L"-function associated to "chi". For the value at "s = 0", the function returns
       in fact for each character "chi" a vector "[r_chi , c_chi]" where "r_chi" is the order of
       "L(s, chi)" at "s = 0" and "c_chi" the first non-zero term in the expansion of "L(s, chi)"
       at "s = 0"; in other words

         "L(s, chi) = c_chi.s^{r_chi} + O(s^{r_chi + 1})"

       near 0. flag is optional, default value is 0; its binary digits mean 1: compute at "s = 1"
       if set to 1 or "s = 0" if set to 0, 2: compute the primitive "L"-functions associated to
       "chi" if set to 0 or the "L"-function with Euler factors at prime ideals dividing the
       modulus of bnr removed if set to 1 (this is the so-called "L_S(s, chi)" function where "S"
       is the set of infinite places of the number field together with the finite prime ideals
       dividing the modulus of bnr, see the example below), 3: returns also the character.

       Example:

         bnf = bnfinit(x^2 - 229);
         bnr = bnrinit(bnf,1,1);
         bnrL1(bnr, 0)

       returns the order and the first non-zero term of the abelian "L"-functions "L(s, chi)" at
       "s = 0" where "chi" runs through the characters of the class group of "Q( sqrt {229})".
       Then

         bnr2 = bnrinit(bnf,2,1);
         bnrL1(bnr2,0,2)

       returns the order and the first non-zero terms of the abelian "L"-functions "L_S(s, chi)"
       at "s = 0" where "chi" runs through the characters of the class group of "Q( sqrt {229})"
       and "S" is the set of infinite places of "Q( sqrt {229})" together with the finite prime 2
       (note that the ray class group modulo 2 is in fact the class group, so "bnrL1(bnr2,0)"
       returns exactly the same answer as "bnrL1(bnr,0)"!).

       The library syntax is bnrL1"(bnr,subgroup,flag,prec)"

   bnrclass"(bnf,ideal,{flag = 0})"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (the units are mandatory unless the
       ideal is trivial), and ideal being either an ideal in any form or a two-component row
       vector containing an ideal and an "r_1"-component row vector of flags indicating which
       real Archimedean embeddings to take in the module, computes the ray class group of the
       number field for the module ideal, as a 3-component vector as all other finite Abelian
       groups (cardinality, vector of cyclic components, corresponding generators).

       If "flag = 2", the output is different. It is a 6-component vector "w". "w[1]" is "bnf".
       "w[2]" is the result of applying "idealstar(bnf,I,2)". "w[3]", "w[4]" and "w[6]" are
       technical components used only by the function "bnrisprincipal". "w[5]" is the structure
       of the ray class group as would have been output with "flag = 0".

       If "flag = 1", as above, except that the generators of the ray class group are not
       computed, which saves time.

       The library syntax is bnrclass0"(bnf,ideal,flag,prec)".

   bnrclassno"(bnf,I)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (units are mandatory unless the
       ideal is trivial), and "I" being either an ideal in any form or a two-component row vector
       containing an ideal and an "r_1"-component row vector of flags indicating which real
       Archimedean embeddings to take in the modulus, computes the ray class number of the number
       field for the modulus "I". This is faster than "bnrclass" and should be used if only the
       ray class number is desired.

       The library syntax is rayclassno"(bnf,I)".

   bnrclassnolist"(bnf,list)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (units are mandatory unless the
       ideal is trivial), and list being a list of modules as output by "ideallist" of
       "ideallistarch", outputs the list of the class numbers of the corresponding ray class
       groups.

       The library syntax is rayclassnolist"(bnf,list)".

   bnrconductor"(a_1,{a_2},{a_3}, {flag = 0})"
       conductor of the subfield of a ray class field as defined by "[a_1,a_2,a_3]" (see "bnr" at
       the beginning of this section).

       The library syntax is bnrconductor"(a_1,a_2,a_3,flag,prec)", where an omitted argument
       among the "a_i" is input as "gzero", and "flag" is a C long.

   bnrconductorofchar"(bnr,chi)"
       bnr being a big ray number field as output by "bnrclass", and chi being a row vector
       representing a character as expressed on the generators of the ray class group, gives the
       conductor of this character as a modulus.

       The library syntax is bnrconductorofchar"(bnr,chi,prec)" where "prec" is a "long".

   bnrdisc"(a1,{a2},{a3},{flag = 0})"
       "a1", "a2", "a3" defining a big ray number field "L" over a groud field "K" (see "bnr" at
       the beginning of this section for the meaning of "a1", "a2", "a3"), outputs a 3-component
       row vector "[N,R_1,D]", where "N" is the (absolute) degree of "L", "R_1" the number of
       real places of "L", and "D" the discriminant of "L/Q", including sign (if "flag = 0").

       If "flag = 1", as above but outputs relative data. "N" is now the degree of "L/K", "R_1"
       is the number of real places of "K" unramified in "L" (so that the number of real places
       of "L" is equal to "R_1" times the relative degree "N"), and "D" is the relative
       discriminant ideal of "L/K".

       If "flag = 2", does as in case 0, except that if the modulus is not the exact conductor
       corresponding to the "L", no data is computed and the result is 0 ("gzero").

       If "flag = 3", as case 2, outputting relative data.

       The library syntax is bnrdisc0"(a1,a2,a3,flag,prec)".

   bnrdisclist"(bnf,bound,{arch},{flag = 0})"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (the units are mandatory), computes
       a list of discriminants of Abelian extensions of the number field by increasing modulus
       norm up to bound bound, where the ramified Archimedean places are given by arch
       (unramified at infinity if arch is void or omitted). If flag is non-zero, give arch all
       the possible values. (See "bnr" at the beginning of this section for the meaning of "a1",
       "a2", "a3".)

       The alternative syntax "bnrdisclist(bnf,list)" is supported, where list is as output by
       "ideallist" or "ideallistarch" (with units).

       The output format is as follows. The output "v" is a row vector of row vectors, allowing
       the bound to be greater than "2^{16}" for 32-bit machines, and "v[i][j]" is understood to
       be in fact "V[2^{15}(i-1)+j]" of a unique big vector "V" (note that "2^{15}" is hardwired
       and can be increased in the source code only on 64-bit machines and higher).

       Such a component "V[k]" is itself a vector "W" (maybe of length 0) whose components
       correspond to each possible ideal of norm "k". Each component "W[i]" corresponds to an
       Abelian extension "L" of "bnf" whose modulus is an ideal of norm "k" and no Archimedean
       components (hence the extension is unramified at infinity). The extension "W[i]" is
       represented by a 4-component row vector "[m,d,r,D]" with the following meaning. "m" is the
       prime ideal factorization of the modulus, "d = [L:Q]" is the absolute degree of "L", "r"
       is the number of real places of "L", and "D" is the factorization of the absolute
       discriminant. Each prime ideal "pr = [p,alpha,e,f,beta]" in the prime factorization "m" is
       coded as "p.n^2+(f-1).n+(j-1)", where "n" is the degree of the base field and "j" is such
       that

       "pr = idealprimedec(nf,p)[j]".

       "m" can be decoded using "bnfdecodemodule".

       The library syntax is bnrdisclist0"(a1,a2,a3,bound,arch,flag)".

   bnrinit"(bnf,ideal,{flag = 0})"
       "bnf" is as output by "bnfinit", ideal is a valid ideal (or a module), initializes data
       linked to the ray class group structure corresponding to this module. This is the same as
       "bnrclass(bnf,ideal,flag+1)".

       The library syntax is bnrinit0"(bnf,ideal,flag,prec)".

   bnrisconductor"(a1,{a2},{a3})"
       "a1", "a2", "a3" represent an extension of the base field, given by class field theory for
       some modulus encoded in the parameters. Outputs 1 if this modulus is the conductor, and 0
       otherwise. This is slightly faster than "bnrconductor".

       The library syntax is bnrisconductor"(a1,a2,a3)" and the result is a "long".

   bnrisprincipal"(bnr,x,{flag = 1})"
       bnr being the number field data which is output by "bnrinit""(,,1)" and "x" being an ideal
       in any form, outputs the components of "x" on the ray class group generators in a way
       similar to "bnfisprincipal". That is a 3-component vector "v" where "v[1]" is the vector
       of components of "x" on the ray class group generators, "v[2]" gives on the integral basis
       an element "alpha" such that "x = alphaprod_ig_i^{x_i}". Finally "v[3]" indicates the
       number of bits of accuracy left in the result. In any case the result is checked for
       correctness, but "v[3]" is included to see if it is necessary to increase the accuracy in
       other computations.

       If "flag = 0", outputs only "v_1". In that case, bnr need not contain the ray class group
       generators, i.e. it may be created with "bnrinit""(,,0)"

       The library syntax is isprincipalrayall"(bnr,x,flag)".

   bnrrootnumber"(bnr,chi,{flag = 0})"
       if "chi = chi" is a (not necessarily primitive) character over bnr, let "L(s,chi) =
       sum_{id} chi(id) N(id)^{-s}" be the associated Artin L-function. Returns the so-called
       Artin root number, i.e. the complex number "W(chi)" of modulus 1 such that

         "Lambda(1-s,chi) = W(chi) Lambda(s,\overline{chi})"

       where "Lambda(s,chi) = A(chi)^{s/2}gamma_chi(s) L(s,chi)" is the enlarged L-function
       associated to "L".

       The generators of the ray class group are needed, and you can set "flag = 1" if the
       character is known to be primitive. Example:

         bnf = bnfinit(x^2 - 145);
         bnr = bnrinit(bnf,7,1);
         bnrrootnumber(bnr, [5])

       returns the root number of the character "chi" of "Cl_7(Q( sqrt {145}))" such that "chi(g)
       = zeta^5", where "g" is the generator of the ray-class field and "zeta = e^{2iPi/N}" where
       "N" is the order of "g" ("N = 12" as "bnr.cyc" readily tells us).

       The library syntax is bnrrootnumber"(bnf,chi,flag)"

   bnrstark"{(bnr,subgroup,{flag = 0})}"
       bnr being as output by "bnrinit(,,1)", finds a relative equation for the class field
       corresponding to the modulus in bnr and the given congruence subgroup using Stark units
       (set "subgroup = 0" if you want the whole ray class group). The main variable of bnr must
       not be "x", and the ground field and the class field must be totally real and not
       isomorphic to Q (over the rationnals, use "polsubcyclo" or "galoissubcyclo"). flag is
       optional and may be set to 0 to obtain a reduced relative polynomial, 1 to be satisfied
       with any relative polynomial, 2 to obtain an absolute polynomial and 3 to obtain the
       irreducible relative polynomial of the Stark unit, 0 being default.  Example:

         bnf = bnfinit(y^2 - 3);
         bnr = bnrinit(bnf, 5, 1);
         bnrstark(bnr, 0)

       returns the ray class field of "Q( sqrt {3})" modulo 5.

       Remark. The result of the computation depends on the choice of a modulus verifying special
       conditions. By default the function will try few moduli, choosing the one giving the
       smallest result. In some cases where the result is however very large, you can tell the
       function to try more moduli by adding 4 to the value of flag. Whether this flag is set or
       not, the function may fail in some extreme cases, returning the error message

       "Cannot find a suitable modulus in FindModule".

       In this case, the corresponding congruence group is a product of cyclic groups and, for
       the time being, the class field has to be obtained by splitting this group into its cyclic
       components.

       The library syntax is bnrstark"(bnr,subgroup,flag)".

   dirzetak"(nf,b)"
       gives as a vector the first "b" coefficients of the Dedekind zeta function of the number
       field "nf" considered as a Dirichlet series.

       The library syntax is dirzetak"(nf,b)".

   factornf"(x,t)"
       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" over the number field defined by the
       (univariate) polynomial "t". "x" may have coefficients in Q or in the number field. The
       main variable of "t" must be of lower priority than that of "x" (in other words the
       variable number of "t" must be greater than that of "x"). However if the coefficients of
       the number field occur explicitly (as polmods) as coefficients of "x", the variable of
       these polmods must be the same as the main variable of "t". For example

         ? factornf(x^2 + Mod(y, y^2+1), y^2+1);
         ? factornf(x^2 + 1, y^2+1); \\ these two are OK
         ? factornf(x^2 + Mod(z,z^2+1), y^2+1)
           ***   incorrect type in gmulsg

       The library syntax is polfnf"(x,t)".

   galoisfixedfield"(gal,perm,{fl = 0},{v = y}))"
       gal being be a Galois field as output by "galoisinit" and perm an element of "gal.group"
       or a vector of such elements, computes the fixed field of gal by the automorphism defined
       by the permutations perm of the roots "gal.roots". "P" is guaranteed to be squarefree
       modulo "gal.p".

       If no flags or "flag = 0", output format is the same as for "nfsubfield", returning
       "[P,x]" such that "P" is a polynomial defining the fixed field, and "x" is a root of "P"
       expressed as a polmod in "gal.pol".

       If "flag = 1" return only the polynomial "P".

       If "flag = 2" return "[P,x,F]" where "P" and "x" are as above and "F" is the factorization
       of "gal.pol" over the field defined by "P", where variable "v" ("y" by default) stands for
       a root of "P". The priority of "v" must be less than the priority of the variable of
       "gal.pol".

       Example:

         G = galoisinit(x^4+1);
         galoisfixedfield(G,G.group[2],2)
           [x^2 + 2, Mod(x^3 + x, x^4 + 1), [x^2 - y*x - 1, x^2 + y*x - 1]]

       computes the factorization  "x^4+1 = (x^2- sqrt {-2}x-1)(x^2+ sqrt {-2}x-1)"

       The library syntax is galoisfixedfield"(gal,perm,p)".

   galoisinit"(pol,{den})"
       computes the Galois group and all neccessary information for computing the fixed fields of
       the Galois extension "K/Q" where "K" is the number field defined by "pol" (monic
       irreducible polynomial in "Z[X]" or a number field as output by "nfinit"). The extension
       "K/Q" must be Galois with Galois group ``weakly'' super-solvable (see "nfgaloisconj")

       Warning: The interface of this function is experimental, so the described output can be
       subject to important changes in the near future. However the function itself should work
       as described. For any remarks about this interface, please mail
       "allomber AT math.fr".

       The output is an 8-component vector gal.

       "gal[1]" contains the polynomial pol ("gal.pol").

       "gal[2]" is a three--components vector "[p,e,q]" where "p" is a prime number ("gal.p")
       such that pol totally split modulo "p" , "e" is an integer and "q = p^e" ("gal.mod") is
       the modulus of the roots in "gal.roots".

       "gal[3]" is a vector "L" containing the "p"-adic roots of pol as integers implicitly
       modulo "gal.mod".  ("gal.roots").

       "gal[4]" is the inverse of the Van der Monde matrix of the "p"-adic roots of pol,
       multiplied by "gal[5]".

       "gal[5]" is a multiple of the least common denominator of the automorphisms expressed as
       polynomial in a root of pol.

       "gal[6]" is the Galois group "G" expressed as a vector of permutations of "L"
       ("gal.group").

       "gal[7]" is a generating subset "S = [s_1,...,s_g]" of "G" expressed as a vector of
       permutations of "L" ("gal.gen").

       "gal[8]" contains the relative orders "[o_1,...,o_g]" of the generators of "S"
       ("gal.orders").

       Let "H" be the maximal normal supersolvable subgroup of "G", we have the following
       properties:

         "*" if "G/H ~  A_4" then "[o_1,...,o_g]" ends by "[2,2,3]".

         "*" if "G/H ~  S_4" then "[o_1,...,o_g]" ends by "[2,2,3,2]".

         "*" else "G" is super-solvable.

         "*" for "1 <= i <= g" the subgroup of "G" generated by "[s_1,...,s_g]" is normal, with
       the exception of "i = g-2" in the second case and of "i = g-3" in the third.

         "*" the relative order "o_i" of "s_i" is its order in the quotient group
       "G/<s_1,...,s_{i-1}>", with the same exceptions.

         "*" for any "x belongs to G" there exists a unique family "[e_1,...,e_g]" such that (no
       exceptions):

       -- for "1 <= i <= g" we have "0 <= e_i < o_i"

       -- "x = g_1^{e_1}g_2^{e_2}...g_n^{e_n}"

       If present "den" must be a suitable value for "gal[5]".

       The library syntax is galoisinit"(gal,den)".

   galoispermtopol"(gal,perm)"
       gal being a galois field as output by "galoisinit" and perm a element of "gal.group",
       return the polynomial defining the Galois automorphism, as output by "nfgaloisconj",
       associated with the permutation perm of the roots "gal.roots". perm can also be a vector
       or matrix, in this case, "galoispermtopol" is applied to all components recursively.

       Note that

         G = galoisinit(pol);
         galoispermtopol(G, G[6])~

       is equivalent to "nfgaloisconj(pol)", if degree of pol is greater or equal to 2.

       The library syntax is galoispermtopol"(gal,perm)".

   galoissubcyclo"(n,H,{Z},{v})"
       compute a polynomial defining the subfield of "Q(zeta_n)" fixed by the subgroup H of
       "Z/nZ". The subgroup H can be given by a generator, a set of generators given by a vector
       or a HNF matrix. If present "Z" must be znstar(n), and is currently only used when H is a
       HNF matrix. If v is given, the polynomial is given in the variable v.

       The following function can be used to compute all subfields of "Q(zeta_n)" (of order less
       than "d", if "d" is set):

         subcyclo(n, d = -1)=
         {
           local(Z,G,S);
           if (d < 0, d = n);
           Z = znstar(n);
           G = matdiagonal(Z[2]);
           S = [];
           forsubgroup(H = G, d,
             S = concat(S, galoissubcyclo(n, mathnf(concat(G,H)),Z));
           );
           S
         }

       The library syntax is galoissubcyclo"(n,H,Z,v)" where n is a C long integer.

   idealadd"(nf,x,y)"
       sum of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field "nf". When "x" and "y" are given by
       Z-bases, this does not depend on "nf" and can be used to compute the sum of any two
       Z-modules. The result is given in HNF.

       The library syntax is idealadd"(nf,x,y)".

   idealaddtoone"(nf,x,{y})"
       "x" and "y" being two co-prime integral ideals (given in any form), this gives a two-
       component row vector "[a,b]" such that "a belongs to x", "b belongs to y" and "a+b = 1".

       The alternative syntax "idealaddtoone(nf,v)", is supported, where "v" is a "k"-component
       vector of ideals (given in any form) which sum to "Z_K". This outputs a "k"-component
       vector "e" such that "e[i] belongs to x[i]" for "1 <= i <= k" and "sum_{1 <= i <= k}e[i] =
       1".

       The library syntax is idealaddtoone0"(nf,x,y)", where an omitted "y" is coded as "NULL".

   idealappr"(nf,x,{flag = 0})"
       if "x" is a fractional ideal (given in any form), gives an element "alpha" in "nf" such
       that for all prime ideals "p" such that the valuation of "x" at "p" is non-zero, we have
       "v_{p}(alpha) = v_{p}(x)", and. "v_{p}(alpha) >= 0" for all other "{p}".

       If "flag" is non-zero, "x" must be given as a prime ideal factorization, as output by
       "idealfactor", but possibly with zero or negative exponents.  This yields an element
       "alpha" such that for all prime ideals "p" occurring in "x", "v_{p}(alpha)" is equal to
       the exponent of "p" in "x", and for all other prime ideals, "v_{p}(alpha) >= 0". This
       generalizes "idealappr(nf,x,0)" since zero exponents are allowed. Note that the algorithm
       used is slightly different, so that "idealapp(nf,idealfactor(nf,x))" may not be the same
       as "idealappr(nf,x,1)".

       The library syntax is idealappr0"(nf,x,flag)".

   idealchinese"(nf,x,y)"
       "x" being a prime ideal factorization (i.e. a 2 by 2 matrix whose first column contain
       prime ideals, and the second column integral exponents), "y" a vector of elements in "nf"
       indexed by the ideals in "x", computes an element "b" such that

       "v_p(b - y_p) >= v_p(x)" for all prime ideals in "x" and "v_p(b) >= 0" for all other "p".

       The library syntax is idealchinese"(nf,x,y)".

   idealcoprime"(nf,x,y)"
       given two integral ideals "x" and "y" in the number field "nf", finds a "beta" in the
       field, expressed on the integral basis "nf[7]", such that "beta.y" is an integral ideal
       coprime to "x".

       The library syntax is idealcoprime"(nf,x)".

   idealdiv"(nf,x,y,{flag = 0})"
       quotient "x.y^{-1}" of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field "nf". The result is
       given in HNF.

       If "flag" is non-zero, the quotient "x.y^{-1}" is assumed to be an integral ideal. This
       can be much faster when the norm of the quotient is small even though the norms of "x" and
       "y" are large.

       The library syntax is idealdiv0"(nf,x,y,flag)". Also available are "idealdiv(nf,x,y)"
       ("flag = 0") and "idealdivexact(nf,x,y)" ("flag = 1").

   idealfactor"(nf,x)"
       factors into prime ideal powers the ideal "x" in the number field "nf". The output format
       is similar to the "factor" function, and the prime ideals are represented in the form
       output by the "idealprimedec" function, i.e. as 5-element vectors.

       The library syntax is idealfactor"(nf,x)".

   idealhnf"(nf,a,{b})"
       gives the Hermite normal form matrix of the ideal "a". The ideal can be given in any form
       whatsoever (typically by an algebraic number if it is principal, by a "Z_K"-system of
       generators, as a prime ideal as given by "idealprimedec", or by a Z-basis).

       If "b" is not omitted, assume the ideal given was "aZ_K+bZ_K", where "a" and "b" are
       elements of "K" given either as vectors on the integral basis "nf[7]" or as algebraic
       numbers.

       The library syntax is idealhnf0"(nf,a,b)" where an omitted "b" is coded as "NULL".  Also
       available is "idealhermite(nf,a)" ("b" omitted).

   idealintersect"(nf,x,y)"
       intersection of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field "nf". When "x" and "y" are
       given by Z-bases, this does not depend on "nf" and can be used to compute the intersection
       of any two Z-modules. The result is given in HNF.

       The library syntax is idealintersect"(nf,x,y)".

   idealinv"(nf,x)"
       inverse of the ideal "x" in the number field "nf". The result is the Hermite normal form
       of the inverse of the ideal, together with the opposite of the Archimedean information if
       it is given.

       The library syntax is idealinv"(nf,x)".

   ideallist"(nf,bound,{flag = 4})"
       computes the list of all ideals of norm less or equal to bound in the number field nf. The
       result is a row vector with exactly bound components.  Each component is itself a row
       vector containing the information about ideals of a given norm, in no specific order. This
       information can be either the HNF of the ideal or the "idealstar" with possibly some
       additional information.

       If "flag" is present, its binary digits are toggles meaning

         1: give also the generators in the "idealstar".

         2: output "[L,U]", where "L" is as before and "U" is a vector of "zinternallog"s of the
       units.

         4: give only the ideals and not the "idealstar" or the "ideallog" of the units.

       The library syntax is ideallist0"(nf,bound,flag)", where bound must be a C long integer.
       Also available is "ideallist(nf,bound)", corresponding to the case "flag = 0".

   ideallistarch"(nf,list,{arch = []},{flag = 0})"
       vector of vectors of all "idealstarinit" (see "idealstar") of all modules in list, with
       Archimedean part arch added (void if omitted). list is a vector of big ideals, as output
       by "ideallist""(..., flag)" for instance. "flag" is optional; its binary digits are
       toggles meaning: 1: give generators as well, 2: list format is "[L,U]" (see "ideallist").

       The library syntax is ideallistarch0"(nf,list,arch,flag)", where an omitted arch is coded
       as "NULL".

   ideallog"(nf,x,bid)"
       "nf" being a number field, bid being a ``big ideal'' as output by "idealstar" and "x"
       being a non-necessarily integral element of nf which must have valuation equal to 0 at all
       prime ideals dividing "I = bid[1]", computes the ``discrete logarithm'' of "x" on the
       generators given in "bid[2]".  In other words, if "g_i" are these generators, of orders
       "d_i" respectively, the result is a column vector of integers "(x_i)" such that "0 <= x_i
       < d_i" and

         "x = prod_ig_i^{x_i} (mod ^*I) ."

       Note that when "I" is a module, this implies also sign conditions on the embeddings.

       The library syntax is zideallog"(nf,x,bid)".

   idealmin"(nf,x,{vdir})"
       computes a minimum of the ideal "x" in the direction vdir in the number field nf.

       The library syntax is minideal"(nf,x,vdir,prec)", where an omitted vdir is coded as
       "NULL".

   idealmul"(nf,x,y,{flag = 0})"
       ideal multiplication of the ideals "x" and "y" in the number field nf. The result is a
       generating set for the ideal product with at most "n" elements, and is in Hermite normal
       form if either "x" or "y" is in HNF or is a prime ideal as output by "idealprimedec", and
       this is given together with the sum of the Archimedean information in "x" and "y" if both
       are given.

       If "flag" is non-zero, reduce the result using "idealred".

       The library syntax is idealmul"(nf,x,y)" ("flag = 0") or "idealmulred(nf,x,y,prec)" ("flag
       ! = 0"), where as usual, "prec" is a C long integer representing the precision.

   idealnorm"(nf,x)"
       computes the norm of the ideal "x" in the number field "nf".

       The library syntax is idealnorm"(nf, x)".

   idealpow"(nf,x,k,{flag = 0})"
       computes the "k"-th power of the ideal "x" in the number field "nf". "k" can be positive,
       negative or zero. The result is NOT reduced, it is really the "k"-th ideal power, and is
       given in HNF.

       If "flag" is non-zero, reduce the result using "idealred". Note however that this is NOT
       the same as as "idealpow(nf,x,k)" followed by reduction, since the reduction is performed
       throughout the powering process.

       The library syntax corresponding to "flag = 0" is "idealpow(nf,x,k)". If "k" is a "long",
       you can use "idealpows(nf,x,k)". Corresponding to "flag = 1" is
       "idealpowred(nf,vp,k,prec)", where "prec" is a "long".

   idealprimedec"(nf,p)"
       computes the prime ideal decomposition of the prime number "p" in the number field "nf".
       "p" must be a (positive) prime number. Note that the fact that "p" is prime is not
       checked, so if a non-prime number "p" is given it may lead to unpredictable results.

       The result is a vector of 5-component vectors, each representing one of the prime ideals
       above "p" in the number field "nf". The representation "vp = [p,a,e,f,b]" of a prime ideal
       means the following. The prime ideal is equal to "pZ_K+alphaZ_K" where "Z_K" is the ring
       of integers of the field and "alpha = sum_i a_iomega_i" where the "omega_i" form the
       integral basis "nf.zk", "e" is the ramification index, "f" is the residual index, and "b"
       is an "n"-component column vector representing a "beta belongs to Z_K" such that "vp^{-1}
       = Z_K+beta/pZ_K" which will be useful for computing valuations, but which the user can
       ignore. The number "alpha" is guaranteed to have a valuation equal to 1 at the prime ideal
       (this is automatic if "e > 1").

       The library syntax is idealprimedec"(nf,p)".

   idealprincipal"(nf,x)"
       creates the principal ideal generated by the algebraic number "x" (which must be of type
       integer, rational or polmod) in the number field "nf". The result is a one-column matrix.

       The library syntax is principalideal"(nf,x)".

   idealred"(nf,I,{vdir = 0})"
       LLL reduction of the ideal "I" in the number field nf, along the direction vdir.  If vdir
       is present, it must be an "r1+r2"-component vector ("r1" and "r2" number of real and
       complex places of nf as usual).

       This function finds a ``small'' "a" in "I" (it is an LLL pseudo-minimum along direction
       vdir). The result is the Hermite normal form of the LLL-reduced ideal "r I/a", where "r"
       is a rational number such that the resulting ideal is integral and primitive. This is
       often, but not always, a reduced ideal in the sense of Buchmann. If "I" is an idele, the
       logarithmic embeddings of "a" are subtracted to the Archimedean part.

       More often than not, a principal ideal will yield the identity matrix. This is a quick and
       dirty way to check if ideals are principal without computing a full "bnf" structure, but
       it's not a necessary condition; hence, a non-trivial result doesn't prove the ideal is
       non-trivial in the class group.

       Note that this is not the same as the LLL reduction of the lattice "I" since ideal
       operations are involved.

       The library syntax is ideallllred"(nf,x,vdir,prec)", where an omitted vdir is coded as
       "NULL".

   idealstar"(nf,I,{flag = 1})"
       nf being a number field, and "I" either and ideal in any form, or a row vector whose first
       component is an ideal and whose second component is a row vector of "r_1" 0 or 1, outputs
       necessary data for computing in the group "(Z_K/I)^*".

       If "flag = 2", the result is a 5-component vector "w". "w[1]" is the ideal or module "I"
       itself. "w[2]" is the structure of the group. The other components are difficult to
       describe and are used only in conjunction with the function "ideallog".

       If "flag = 1" (default), as "flag = 2", but do not compute explicit generators for the
       cyclic components, which saves time.

       If "flag = 0", computes the structure of "(Z_K/I)^*" as a 3-component vector "v". "v[1]"
       is the order, "v[2]" is the vector of SNF cyclic components and "v[3]" the corresponding
       generators. When the row vector is explicitly included, the non-zero elements of this
       vector are considered as real embeddings of nf in the order given by "polroots", i.e. in
       nf[6] ("nf.roots"), and then "I" is a module with components at infinity.

       To solve discrete logarithms (using "ideallog"), you have to choose "flag = 2".

       The library syntax is idealstar0"(nf,I,flag)".

   idealtwoelt"(nf,x,{a})"
       computes a two-element representation of the ideal "x" in the number field "nf", using a
       straightforward (exponential time) search. "x" can be an ideal in any form, (including
       perhaps an Archimedean part, which is ignored) and the result is a row vector "[a,alpha]"
       with two components such that "x = aZ_K+alphaZ_K" and "a belongs to Z", where "a" is the
       one passed as argument if any. If "x" is given by at least two generators, "a" is chosen
       to be the positive generator of "x cap Z".

       Note that when an explicit "a" is given, we use an asymptotically faster method, however
       in practice it is usually slower.

       The library syntax is ideal_two_elt0"(nf,x,a)", where an omitted "a" is entered as "NULL".

   idealval"(nf,x,vp)"
       gives the valuation of the ideal "x" at the prime ideal vp in the number field "nf", where
       vp must be a 5-component vector as given by "idealprimedec".

       The library syntax is idealval"(nf,x,vp)", and the result is a "long" integer.

   ideleprincipal"(nf,x)"
       creates the principal idele generated by the algebraic number "x" (which must be of type
       integer, rational or polmod) in the number field "nf". The result is a two-component
       vector, the first being a one-column matrix representing the corresponding principal
       ideal, and the second being the vector with "r_1+r_2" components giving the complex
       logarithmic embedding of "x".

       The library syntax is principalidele"(nf,x)".

   matalgtobasis"(nf,x)"
       "nf" being a number field in "nfinit" format, and "x" a matrix whose coefficients are
       expressed as polmods in "nf", transforms this matrix into a matrix whose coefficients are
       expressed on the integral basis of "nf". This is the same as applying "nfalgtobasis" to
       each entry, but it would be dangerous to use the same name.

       The library syntax is matalgtobasis"(nf,x)".

   matbasistoalg"(nf,x)"
       "nf" being a number field in "nfinit" format, and "x" a matrix whose coefficients are
       expressed as column vectors on the integral basis of "nf", transforms this matrix into a
       matrix whose coefficients are algebraic numbers expressed as polmods. This is the same as
       applying "nfbasistoalg" to each entry, but it would be dangerous to use the same name.

       The library syntax is matbasistoalg"(nf,x)".

   modreverse"(a)"
       "a" being a polmod A(X) modulo T(X), finds the ``reverse polmod'' B(X) modulo Q(X), where
       "Q" is the minimal polynomial of "a", which must be equal to the degree of "T", and such
       that if "theta" is a root of "T" then "theta = B(alpha)" for a certain root "alpha" of
       "Q".

       This is very useful when one changes the generating element in algebraic extensions.

       The library syntax is polmodrecip"(x)".

   newtonpoly"(x,p)"
       gives the vector of the slopes of the Newton polygon of the polynomial "x" with respect to
       the prime number "p". The "n" components of the vector are in decreasing order, where "n"
       is equal to the degree of "x". Vertical slopes occur iff the constant coefficient of "x"
       is zero and are denoted by "VERYBIGINT", the biggest single precision integer
       representable on the machine ("2^{31}-1" (resp. "2^{63}-1") on 32-bit (resp. 64-bit)
       machines), see "Label se:valuation".

       The library syntax is newtonpoly"(x,p)".

   nfalgtobasis"(nf,x)"
       this is the inverse function of "nfbasistoalg". Given an object "x" whose entries are
       expressed as algebraic numbers in the number field "nf", transforms it so that the entries
       are expressed as a column vector on the integral basis "nf.zk".

       The library syntax is algtobasis"(nf,x)".

   nfbasis"(x,{flag = 0},{p})"
       integral basis of the number field defined by the irreducible, preferably monic,
       polynomial "x", using a modified version of the round 4 algorithm by default. The binary
       digits of "flag" have the following meaning:

       1: assume that no square of a prime greater than the default "primelimit" divides the
       discriminant of "x", i.e. that the index of "x" has only small prime divisors.

       2: use round 2 algorithm. For small degrees and coefficient size, this is sometimes a
       little faster. (This program is the translation into C of a program written by David Ford
       in Algeb.)

       Thus for instance, if "flag = 3", this uses the round 2 algorithm and outputs an order
       which will be maximal at all the small primes.

       If "p" is present, we assume (without checking!) that it is the two-column matrix of the
       factorization of the discriminant of the polynomial "x". Note that it does not have to be
       a complete factorization. This is especially useful if only a local integral basis for
       some small set of places is desired: only factors with exponents greater or equal to 2
       will be considered.

       The library syntax is nfbasis0"(x,flag,p)". An extended version is "nfbasis(x,&d,flag,p)",
       where "d" will receive the discriminant of the number field (not of the polynomial "x"),
       and an omitted "p" should be input as "gzero". Also available are "base(x,&d)" ("flag =
       0"), "base2(x,&d)" ("flag = 2") and "factoredbase(x,p,&d)".

   nfbasistoalg"(nf,x)"
       this is the inverse function of "nfalgtobasis". Given an object "x" whose entries are
       expressed on the integral basis "nf.zk", transforms it into an object whose entries are
       algebraic numbers (i.e. polmods).

       The library syntax is basistoalg"(nf,x)".

   nfdetint"(nf,x)"
       given a pseudo-matrix "x", computes a non-zero ideal contained in (i.e. multiple of) the
       determinant of "x". This is particularly useful in conjunction with "nfhnfmod".

       The library syntax is nfdetint"(nf,x)".

   nfdisc"(x,{flag = 0},{p})"
       field discriminant of the number field defined by the integral, preferably monic,
       irreducible polynomial "x". "flag" and "p" are exactly as in "nfbasis". That is, "p"
       provides the matrix of a partial factorization of the discriminant of "x", and binary
       digits of "flag" are as follows:

       1: assume that no square of a prime greater than "primelimit" divides the discriminant.

       2: use the round 2 algorithm, instead of the default round 4.  This should be slower
       except maybe for polynomials of small degree and coefficients.

       The library syntax is nfdiscf0"(x,flag,p)" where, to omit "p", you should input "gzero".
       You can also use "discf(x)" ("flag = 0").

   nfeltdiv"(nf,x,y)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes their quotient "x/y" in the number field
       "nf".

       The library syntax is element_div"(nf,x,y)".

   nfeltdiveuc"(nf,x,y)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes an algebraic integer "q" in the number
       field "nf" such that the components of "x-qy" are reasonably small. In fact, this is
       functionally identical to "round(nfeltdiv(nf,x,y))".

       The library syntax is nfdiveuc"(nf,x,y)".

   nfeltdivmodpr"(nf,x,y,pr)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf and pr a prime ideal in "modpr" format (see
       "nfmodprinit"), computes their quotient "x / y" modulo the prime ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_divmodpr"(nf,x,y,pr)".

   nfeltdivrem"(nf,x,y)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, gives a two-element row vector "[q,r]" such that "x
       = qy+r", "q" is an algebraic integer in "nf", and the components of "r" are reasonably
       small.

       The library syntax is nfdivres"(nf,x,y)".

   nfeltmod"(nf,x,y)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes an element "r" of "nf" of the form "r =
       x-qy" with "q" and algebraic integer, and such that "r" is small. This is functionally
       identical to

         "x - nfeltmul(nf,round(nfeltdiv(nf,x,y)),y)."

       The library syntax is nfmod"(nf,x,y)".

   nfeltmul"(nf,x,y)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes their product "x*y" in the number field
       "nf".

       The library syntax is element_mul"(nf,x,y)".

   nfeltmulmodpr"(nf,x,y,pr)"
       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf and pr a prime ideal in "modpr" format (see
       "nfmodprinit"), computes their product "x*y" modulo the prime ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_mulmodpr"(nf,x,y,pr)".

   nfeltpow"(nf,x,k)"
       given an element "x" in nf, and a positive or negative integer "k", computes "x^k" in the
       number field "nf".

       The library syntax is element_pow"(nf,x,k)".

   nfeltpowmodpr"(nf,x,k,pr)"
       given an element "x" in nf, an integer "k" and a prime ideal pr in "modpr" format (see
       "nfmodprinit"), computes "x^k" modulo the prime ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_powmodpr"(nf,x,k,pr)".

   nfeltreduce"(nf,x,ideal)"
       given an ideal in Hermite normal form and an element "x" of the number field "nf", finds
       an element "r" in "nf" such that "x-r" belongs to the ideal and "r" is small.

       The library syntax is element_reduce"(nf,x,ideal)".

   nfeltreducemodpr"(nf,x,pr)"
       given an element "x" of the number field "nf" and a prime ideal pr in "modpr" format
       compute a canonical representative for the class of "x" modulo pr.

       The library syntax is nfreducemodpr2"(nf,x,pr)".

   nfeltval"(nf,x,pr)"
       given an element "x" in nf and a prime ideal pr in the format output by "idealprimedec",
       computes their the valuation at pr of the element "x". The same result could be obtained
       using "idealval(nf,x,pr)" (since "x" would then be converted to a principal ideal), but it
       would be less efficient.

       The library syntax is element_val"(nf,x,pr)", and the result is a "long".

   nffactor"(nf,x)"
       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" over the number field "nf" given by
       "nfinit". "x" has coefficients in "nf" (i.e. either scalar, polmod, polynomial or column
       vector). The main variable of "nf" must be of lower priority than that of "x" (in other
       words, the variable number of "nf" must be greater than that of "x"). However if the
       polynomial defining the number field occurs explicitly  in the coefficients of "x" (as
       modulus of a "t_POLMOD"), its main variable must be the same as the main variable of "x".
       For example,

         ? nf = nfinit(y^2 + 1);
         ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + y); \\ OK
         ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + Mod(y, y^2+1)); \\  OK
         ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + Mod(z, z^2+1)); \\  WRONG

       The library syntax is nffactor"(nf,x)".

   nffactormod"(nf,x,pr)"
       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" modulo the prime ideal pr in the number
       field "nf". "x" can have coefficients in the number field (scalar, polmod, polynomial,
       column vector) or modulo the prime ideal (integermod modulo the rational prime under pr,
       polmod or polynomial with integermod coefficients, column vector of integermod). The prime
       ideal pr must be in the format output by "idealprimedec". The main variable of "nf" must
       be of lower priority than that of "x" (in other words the variable number of "nf" must be
       greater than that of "x"). However if the coefficients of the number field occur
       explicitly (as polmods) as coefficients of "x", the variable of these polmods must be the
       same as the main variable of "t" (see "nffactor").

       The library syntax is nffactormod"(nf,x,pr)".

   nfgaloisapply"(nf,aut,x)"
       "nf" being a number field as output by "nfinit", and aut being a Galois automorphism of
       "nf" expressed either as a polynomial or a polmod (such automorphisms being found using
       for example one of the variants of "nfgaloisconj"), computes the action of the
       automorphism aut on the object "x" in the number field. "x" can be an element (scalar,
       polmod, polynomial or column vector) of the number field, an ideal (either given by
       "Z_K"-generators or by a Z-basis), a prime ideal (given as a 5-element row vector) or an
       idele (given as a 2-element row vector). Because of possible confusion with elements and
       ideals, other vector or matrix arguments are forbidden.

       The library syntax is galoisapply"(nf,aut,x)".

   nfgaloisconj"(nf,{flag = 0},{d})"
       "nf" being a number field as output by "nfinit", computes the conjugates of a root "r" of
       the non-constant polynomial "x = nf[1]" expressed as polynomials in "r". This can be used
       even if the number field "nf" is not Galois since some conjugates may lie in the field. As
       a note to old-timers of PARI, starting with version 2.0.17 this function works much better
       than in earlier versions.

       "nf" can simply be a polynomial if "flag ! = 1".

       If no flags or "flag = 0", if "nf" is a number field use a combination of flag 4 and 1 and
       the result is always complete, else use a combination of flag 4 and 2 and the result is
       subject to the restriction of "flag = 2", but a warning is issued when it is not proven
       complete.

       If "flag = 1", use "nfroots" (require a number field).

       If "flag = 2", use complex approximations to the roots and an integral LLL. The result is
       not guaranteed to be complete: some conjugates may be missing (no warning issued),
       especially so if the corresponding polynomial has a huge index. In that case, increasing
       the default precision may help.

       If "flag = 4", use Allombert's algorithm and permutation testing. If the field is Galois
       with ``weakly'' super solvable Galois group, return the complete list of automorphisms,
       else only the identity element. If present, "d" is assumed to be a multiple of the least
       common denominator of the conjugates expressed as polynomial in a root of pol.

       A group G is ``weakly'' super solvable if it contains a super solvable normal subgroup "H"
       such that "G = H" , or "G/H  ~  A_4" , or "G/H  ~ S_4". Abelian and nilpotent groups are
       ``weakly'' super solvable.  In practice, almost all groups of small order are ``weakly''
       super solvable, the exceptions having order 36(1 exception), 48(2), 56(1), 60(1), 72(5),
       75(1), 80(1), 96(10) and " >= 108".

       Hence "flag = 4" permits to quickly check whether a polynomial of order strictly less than
       36 is Galois or not. This method is much faster than "nfroots" and can be applied to
       polynomials of degree larger than 50.

       The library syntax is galoisconj0"(nf,flag,d,prec)". Also available are "galoisconj(nf)"
       for "flag = 0", "galoisconj2(nf,n,prec)" for "flag = 2" where "n" is a bound on the number
       of conjugates, and  "galoisconj4(nf,d)" corresponding to "flag = 4".

   nfhilbert"(nf,a,b,{pr})"
       if pr is omitted, compute the global Hilbert symbol "(a,b)" in "nf", that is 1 if "x^2 - a
       y^2 - b z^2" has a non trivial solution "(x,y,z)" in "nf", and "-1" otherwise. Otherwise
       compute the local symbol modulo the prime ideal pr (as output by "idealprimedec").

       The library syntax is nfhilbert"(nf,a,b,pr)", where an omitted pr is coded as "NULL".

   nfhnf"(nf,x)"
       given a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)", finds a pseudo-basis in Hermite normal form of the module
       it generates.

       The library syntax is nfhermite"(nf,x)".

   nfhnfmod"(nf,x,detx)"
       given a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" and an ideal detx which is contained in (read integral
       multiple of) the determinant of "(A,I)", finds a pseudo-basis in Hermite normal form of
       the module generated by "(A,I)". This avoids coefficient explosion.  detx can be computed
       using the function "nfdetint".

       The library syntax is nfhermitemod"(nf,x,detx)".

   nfinit"(pol,{flag = 0})"
       pol being a non-constant, preferably monic, irreducible polynomial in "Z[X]", initializes
       a number field structure ("nf") associated to the field "K" defined by pol. As such, it's
       a technical object passed as the first argument to most "nf"xxx functions, but it contains
       some information which may be directly useful. Access to this information via member
       functions is prefered since the specific data organization specified below may change in
       the future. Currently, "nf" is a row vector with 9 components:

       "nf[1]" contains the polynomial pol ("nf.pol").

       "nf[2]" contains "[r1,r2]" ("nf.sign"), the number of real and complex places of "K".

       "nf[3]" contains the discriminant d(K) ("nf.disc") of "K".

       "nf[4]" contains the index of "nf[1]", i.e. "[Z_K : Z[theta]]", where "theta" is any root
       of "nf[1]".

       "nf[5]" is a vector containing 7 matrices "M", "MC", "T2", "T", "MD", "TI", "MDI" useful
       for certain computations in the number field "K".

         "*" "M" is the "(r1+r2) x n" matrix whose columns represent the numerical values of the
       conjugates of the elements of the integral basis.

         "*" "MC" is essentially the conjugate of the transpose of "M", except that the last "r2"
       columns are also multiplied by 2.

         "*" "T2" is an "n x n" matrix equal to the real part of the product "MC.M" (which is a
       real positive definite symmetric matrix), the so-called "T_2"-matrix ("nf.t2").

         "*" "T" is the "n x n" matrix whose coefficients are "Tr(omega_iomega_j)" where the
       "omega_i" are the elements of the integral basis. Note that "T = \overline{MC}.M" and in
       particular that "T = T_2" if the field is totally real (in practice "T_2" will have real
       approximate entries and "T" will have integer entries). Note also that " det (T)" is equal
       to the discriminant of the field "K".

         "*" The columns of "MD" ("nf.diff") express a Z-basis of the different of "K" on the
       integral basis.

         "*" "TI" is equal to "d(K)T^{-1}", which has integral coefficients. Note that,
       understood as as ideal, the matrix "T^{-1}" generates the codifferent ideal.

         "*" Finally, "MDI" is a two-element representation (for faster ideal product) of d(K)
       times the codifferent ideal ("nf.disc*nf.codiff", which is an integral ideal). "MDI" is
       only used in "idealinv".

       "nf[6]" is the vector containing the "r1+r2" roots ("nf.roots") of "nf[1]" corresponding
       to the "r1+r2" embeddings of the number field into C (the first "r1" components are real,
       the next "r2" have positive imaginary part).

       "nf[7]" is an integral basis in Hermite normal form for "Z_K" ("nf.zk") expressed on the
       powers of "theta".

       "nf[8]" is the "n x n" integral matrix expressing the power basis in terms of the integral
       basis, and finally

       "nf[9]" is the "n x n^2" matrix giving the multiplication table of the integral basis.

       If a non monic polynomial is input, "nfinit" will transform it into a monic one, then
       reduce it (see "flag = 3"). It is allowed, though not very useful given the existence of
       nfnewprec, to input a "nf" or a "bnf" instead of a polynomial.

       The special input format "[x,B]" is also accepted where "x" is a polynomial as above and
       "B" is the integer basis, as computed by "nfbasis". This can be useful since "nfinit" uses
       the round 4 algorithm by default, which can be very slow in pathological cases where round
       2 ("nfbasis(x,2)") would succeed very quickly.

       If "flag = 2": pol is changed into another polynomial "P" defining the same number field,
       which is as simple as can easily be found using the "polred" algorithm, and all the
       subsequent computations are done using this new polynomial. In particular, the first
       component of the result is the modified polynomial.

       If "flag = 3", does a "polred" as in case 2, but outputs "[nf,Mod(a,P)]", where "nf" is as
       before and "Mod(a,P) = Mod(x,pol)" gives the change of variables. This is implicit when
       pol is not monic: first a linear change of variables is performed, to get a monic
       polynomial, then a "polred" reduction.

       If "flag = 4", as 2 but uses a partial "polred".

       If "flag = 5", as 3 using a partial "polred".

       The library syntax is nfinit0"(x,flag,prec)".

   nfisideal"(nf,x)"
       returns 1 if "x" is an ideal in the number field "nf", 0 otherwise.

       The library syntax is isideal"(x)".

   nfisincl"(x,y)"
       tests whether the number field "K" defined by the polynomial "x" is conjugate to a
       subfield of the field "L" defined by "y" (where "x" and "y" must be in "Q[X]"). If they
       are not, the output is the number 0. If they are, the output is a vector of polynomials,
       each polynomial "a" representing an embedding of "K" into "L", i.e. being such that "y | x
       o a".

       If "y" is a number field (nf), a much faster algorithm is used (factoring "x" over "y"
       using "nffactor"). Before version 2.0.14, this wasn't guaranteed to return all the
       embeddings, hence was triggered by a special flag. This is no more the case.

       The library syntax is nfisincl"(x,y,flag)".

   nfisisom"(x,y)"
       as "nfisincl", but tests for isomorphism. If either "x" or "y" is a number field, a much
       faster algorithm will be used.

       The library syntax is nfisisom"(x,y,flag)".

   nfnewprec"(nf)"
       transforms the number field "nf" into the corresponding data using current (usually
       larger) precision. This function works as expected if "nf" is in fact a "bnf" (update
       "bnf" to current precision) but may be quite slow (many generators of principal ideals
       have to be computed).

       The library syntax is nfnewprec"(nf,prec)".

   nfkermodpr"(nf,a,pr)"
       kernel of the matrix "a" in "Z_K/pr", where pr is in modpr format (see "nfmodprinit").

       The library syntax is nfkermodpr"(nf,a,pr)".

   nfmodprinit"(nf,pr)"
       transforms the prime ideal pr into "modpr" format necessary for all operations modulo pr
       in the number field nf. Returns a two-component vector "[P,a]", where "P" is the Hermite
       normal form of pr, and "a" is an integral element congruent to 1 modulo pr, and congruent
       to 0 modulo "p / pr^e". Here "p = Z  cap  pr" and "e" is the absolute ramification index.

       The library syntax is nfmodprinit"(nf,pr)".

   nfsubfields"(nf,{d = 0})"
       finds all subfields of degree "d" of the number field "nf" (all subfields if "d" is null
       or omitted).  The result is a vector of subfields, each being given by "[g,h]", where "g"
       is an absolute equation and "h" expresses one of the roots of "g" in terms of the root "x"
       of the polynomial defining "nf". This is a crude implementation by M. Olivier of an
       algorithm due to J. Klueners.

       The library syntax is subfields"(nf,d)".

   nfroots"(nf,x)"
       roots of the polynomial "x" in the number field "nf" given by "nfinit" without
       multiplicity. "x" has coefficients in the number field (scalar, polmod, polynomial, column
       vector). The main variable of "nf" must be of lower priority than that of "x" (in other
       words the variable number of "nf" must be greater than that of "x"). However if the
       coefficients of the number field occur explicitly (as polmods) as coefficients of "x", the
       variable of these polmods must be the same as the main variable of "t" (see "nffactor").

       The library syntax is nfroots"(nf,x)".

   nfrootsof1"(nf)"
       computes the number of roots of unity "w" and a primitive "w"-th root of unity (expressed
       on the integral basis) belonging to the number field "nf". The result is a two-component
       vector "[w,z]" where "z" is a column vector expressing a primitive "w"-th root of unity on
       the integral basis "nf.zk".

       The library syntax is rootsof1"(nf)".

   nfsnf"(nf,x)"
       given a torsion module "x" as a 3-component row vector "[A,I,J]" where "A" is a square
       invertible "n x n" matrix, "I" and "J" are two ideal lists, outputs an ideal list
       "d_1,...,d_n" which is the Smith normal form of "x". In other words, "x" is isomorphic to
       "Z_K/d_1 oplus ... oplus Z_K/d_n" and "d_i" divides "d_{i-1}" for "i >= 2".  The link
       between "x" and "[A,I,J]" is as follows: if "e_i" is the canonical basis of "K^n", "I =
       [b_1,...,b_n]" and "J = [a_1,...,a_n]", then "x" is isomorphic to

         " (b_1e_1 oplus ... oplus  b_ne_n) / (a_1A_1 oplus ... oplus  a_nA_n)
        , "

       where the "A_j" are the columns of the matrix "A". Note that every finitely generated
       torsion module can be given in this way, and even with "b_i = Z_K" for all "i".

       The library syntax is nfsmith"(nf,x)".

   nfsolvemodpr"(nf,a,b,pr)"
       solution of "a.x = b" in "Z_K/pr", where "a" is a matrix and "b" a column vector, and
       where pr is in modpr format (see "nfmodprinit").

       The library syntax is nfsolvemodpr"(nf,a,b,pr)".

   polcompositum"(x,y,{flag = 0})"
       "x" and "y" being polynomials in "Z[X]" in the same variable, outputs a vector giving the
       list of all possible composita of the number fields defined by "x" and "y", if "x" and "y"
       are irreducible, or of the corresponding etale algebras, if they are only squarefree.
       Returns an error if one of the polynomials is not squarefree. When one of the polynomials
       is irreducible (say "x"), it is often much faster to use "nffactor(nfinit(x), y)" then
       "rnfequation".

       If "flag = 1", outputs a vector of 4-component vectors "[z,a,b,k]", where "z" ranges
       through the list of all possible compositums as above, and "a" (resp. "b") expresses the
       root of "x" (resp. "y") as a polmod in a root of "z", and "k" is a small integer k such
       that "a+kb" is the chosen root of "z".

       The compositum will quite often be defined by a complicated polynomial, which it is
       advisable to reduce before further work. Here is a simple example involving the field
       "Q(zeta_5, 5^{1/5})":

         ? z = polcompositum(x^5 - 5, polcyclo(5), 1)[1];
         ? pol = z[1]                 \\ pol defines the compositum
         %2 = x^20 + 5*x^19 + 15*x^18 + 35*x^17 + 70*x^16 + 141*x^15 + 260*x^14 \
           + 355*x^13 + 95*x^12 - 1460*x^11 - 3279*x^10 - 3660*x^9 - 2005*x^8    \
           + 705*x^7 + 9210*x^6 + 13506*x^5 + 7145*x^4 - 2740*x^3 + 1040*x^2     \
           - 320*x + 256
         ? a = z[2]; a^5 - 5          \\ a is a fifth root of 5
         %3 = 0
         ? z = polredabs(pol, 1);     \\ look for a simpler polynomial
         ? pol = z[1]
         %5 = x^20 + 25*x^10 + 5
         ? a = subst(a.pol, x, z[2])  \\ a in the new coordinates
         %6 = Mod(-5/22*x^19 + 1/22*x^14 - 123/22*x^9 + 9/11*x^4, x^20 + 25*x^10 + 5)

       The library syntax is polcompositum0"(x,y,flag)".

   polgalois"(x)"
       Galois group of the non-constant polynomial "x belongs to Q[X]". In the present version
       2.2.0, "x" must be irreducible and the degree of "x" must be less than or equal to 7. On
       certain versions for which the data file of Galois resolvents has been installed
       (available in the Unix distribution as a separate package), degrees 8, 9, 10 and 11 are
       also implemented.

       The output is a 3-component vector "[n,s,k]" with the following meaning: "n" is the
       cardinality of the group, "s" is its signature ("s = 1" if the group is a subgroup of the
       alternating group "A_n", "s = -1" otherwise), and "k" is the number of the group
       corresponding to a given pair "(n,s)" ("k = 1" except in 2 cases). Specifically, the
       groups are coded as follows, using standard notations (see GTM 138, quoted at the
       beginning of this section; see also ``The transitive groups of degree up to eleven'', by
       G. Butler and J. McKay in Communications in Algebra, vol. 11, 1983, pp. 863--911):

       In degree 1: "S_1 = [1,-1,1]".

       In degree 2: "S_2 = [2,-1,1]".

       In degree 3: "A_3 = C_3 = [3,1,1]", "S_3 = [6,-1,1]".

       In degree 4: "C_4 = [4,-1,1]", "V_4 = [4,1,1]", "D_4 = [8,-1,1]", "A_4 = [12,1,1]", "S_4 =
       [24,-1,1]".

       In degree 5: "C_5 = [5,1,1]", "D_5 = [10,1,1]", "M_{20} = [20,-1,1]", "A_5 = [60,1,1]",
       "S_5 = [120,-1,1]".

       In degree 6: "C_6 = [6,-1,1]", "S_3 = [6,-1,2]", "D_6 = [12,-1,1]", "A_4 = [12,1,1]",
       "G_{18} = [18,-1,1]", "S_4^ -= [24,-1,1]", "A_4 x C_2 = [24,-1,2]", "S_4^ += [24,1,1]",
       "G_{36}^ -= [36,-1,1]", "G_{36}^ += [36,1,1]", "S_4 x C_2 = [48,-1,1]", "A_5 = PSL_2(5) =
       [60,1,1]", "G_{72} = [72,-1,1]", "S_5 = PGL_2(5) = [120,-1,1]", "A_6 = [360,1,1]", "S_6 =
       [720,-1,1]".

       In degree 7: "C_7 = [7,1,1]", "D_7 = [14,-1,1]", "M_{21} = [21,1,1]", "M_{42} =
       [42,-1,1]", "PSL_2(7) = PSL_3(2) = [168,1,1]", "A_7 = [2520,1,1]", "S_7 = [5040,-1,1]".

       The method used is that of resolvent polynomials and is sensitive to the current
       precision. The precision is updated internally but, in very rare cases, a wrong result may
       be returned if the initial precision was not sufficient.

       The library syntax is galois"(x,prec)".

   polred"(x,{flag = 0},{p})"
       finds polynomials with reasonably small coefficients defining subfields of the number
       field defined by "x".  One of the polynomials always defines Q (hence is equal to "x-1"),
       and another always defines the same number field as "x" if "x" is irreducible.  All "x"
       accepted by "nfinit" are also allowed here (e.g. non-monic polynomials, "nf", "bnf",
       "[x,Z_K_basis]").

       The following binary digits of "flag" are significant:

       1: does a partial reduction only. This means that only a suborder of the maximal order may
       be used.

       2: gives also elements. The result is a two-column matrix, the first column giving the
       elements defining these subfields, the second giving the corresponding minimal
       polynomials.

       If "p" is given, it is assumed that it is the two-column matrix of the factorization of
       the discriminant of the polynomial "x".

       The library syntax is polred0"(x,flag,p,prec)", where an omitted "p" is coded by "gzero".
       Also available are "polred(x,prec)" and "factoredpolred(x,p,prec)", both corresponding to
       "flag = 0".

   polredabs"(x,{flag = 0})"
       finds one of the polynomial defining the same number field as the one defined by "x", and
       such that the sum of the squares of the modulus of the roots (i.e. the "T_2"-norm) is
       minimal.  All "x" accepted by "nfinit" are also allowed here (e.g. non-monic polynomials,
       "nf", "bnf", "[x,Z_K_basis]").

       The binary digits of "flag" mean

       1: outputs a two-component row vector "[P,a]", where "P" is the default output and "a" is
       an element expressed on a root of the polynomial "P", whose minimal polynomial is equal to
       "x".

       4: gives all polynomials of minimal "T_2" norm (of the two polynomials P(x) and "P(-x)",
       only one is given).

       The library syntax is polredabs0"(x,flag,prec)".

   polredord"(x)"
       finds polynomials with reasonably small coefficients and of the same degree as that of "x"
       defining suborders of the order defined by "x". One of the polynomials always defines Q
       (hence is equal to "(x-1)^n", where "n" is the degree), and another always defines the
       same order as "x" if "x" is irreducible.

       The library syntax is ordred"(x)".

   poltschirnhaus"(x)"
       applies a random Tschirnhausen transformation to the polynomial "x", which is assumed to
       be non-constant and separable, so as to obtain a new equation for the etale algebra
       defined by "x". This is for instance useful when computing resolvents, hence is used by
       the "polgalois" function.

       The library syntax is tschirnhaus"(x)".

   rnfalgtobasis"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or polmod with polmod coefficients, expresses
       "x" on the relative integral basis.

       The library syntax is rnfalgtobasis"(rnf,x)".

   rnfbasis"(bnf,x)"
       given a big number field "bnf" as output by "bnfinit", and either a polynomial "x" with
       coefficients in "bnf" defining a relative extension "L" of "bnf", or a pseudo-basis "x" of
       such an extension, gives either a true "bnf"-basis of "L" if it exists, or an
       "n+1"-element generating set of "L" if not, where "n" is the rank of "L" over "bnf".

       The library syntax is rnfbasis"(bnf,x)".

   rnfbasistoalg"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "L" expressed on the relative integral basis, computes the representation of
       "x" as a polmod with polmods coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfbasistoalg"(rnf,x)".

   rnfcharpoly"(nf,T,a,{v = x})"
       characteristic polynomial of "a" over "nf", where "a" belongs to the algebra defined by
       "T" over "nf", i.e. "nf[X]/(T)". Returns a polynomial in variable "v" ("x" by default).

       The library syntax is rnfcharpoly"(nf,T,a,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

   rnfconductor"(bnf,pol)"
       "bnf" being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", and pol a relative polynomial
       defining an Abelian extension, computes the class field theory conductor of this Abelian
       extension. The result is a 3-component vector "[conductor,rayclgp,subgroup]", where
       conductor is the conductor of the extension given as a 2-component row vector "[f_0,f_ oo
       ]", rayclgp is the full ray class group corresponding to the conductor given as a
       3-component vector [h,cyc,gen] as usual for a group, and subgroup is a matrix in HNF
       defining the subgroup of the ray class group on the given generators gen.

       The library syntax is rnfconductor"(rnf,pol,prec)".

   rnfdedekind"(nf,pol,pr)"
       given a number field "nf" as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with coefficients in
       "nf" defining a relative extension "L" of "nf", evaluates the relative Dedekind criterion
       over the order defined by a root of pol for the prime ideal pr and outputs a 3-component
       vector as the result. The first component is a flag equal to 1 if the enlarged order could
       be proven to be pr-maximal and to 0 otherwise (it may be maximal in the latter case if pr
       is ramified in "L"), the second component is a pseudo-basis of the enlarged order and the
       third component is the valuation at pr of the order discriminant.

       The library syntax is rnfdedekind"(nf,pol,pr)".

   rnfdet"(nf,M)"
       given a pseudomatrix "M" over the maximal order of "nf", computes its pseudodeterminant.

       The library syntax is rnfdet"(nf,M)".

   rnfdisc"(nf,pol)"
       given a number field "nf" as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with coefficients in
       "nf" defining a relative extension "L" of "nf", computes the relative discriminant of "L".
       This is a two-element row vector "[D,d]", where "D" is the relative ideal discriminant and
       "d" is the relative discriminant considered as an element of "nf^*/{nf^*}^2". The main
       variable of "nf" must be of lower priority than that of pol.

       Note: As usual, "nf" can be a "bnf" as output by "nfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfdiscf"(bnf,pol)".

   rnfeltabstorel"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial modulo the absolute equation "rnf[11][1]",
       computes "x" as an element of the relative extension "L/K" as a polmod with polmod
       coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfelementabstorel"(rnf,x)".

   rnfeltdown"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or polmod with polmod coefficients, computes
       "x" as an element of "K" as a polmod, assuming "x" is in "K" (otherwise an error will
       occur). If "x" is given on the relative integral basis, apply "rnfbasistoalg" first,
       otherwise PARI will believe you are dealing with a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementdown"(rnf,x)".

   rnfeltreltoabs"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or polmod with polmod coefficients, computes
       "x" as an element of the absolute extension "L/Q" as a polynomial modulo the absolute
       equation "rnf[11][1]". If "x" is given on the relative integral basis, apply
       "rnfbasistoalg" first, otherwise PARI will believe you are dealing with a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementreltoabs"(rnf,x)".

   rnfeltup"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an element of "K" expressed as a polynomial or polmod, computes "x" as an element of the
       absolute extension "L/Q" as a polynomial modulo the absolute equation "rnf[11][1]". Note
       that it is unnecessary to compute "x" as an element of the relative extension "L/K" (its
       expression would be identical to itself). If "x" is given on the integral basis of "K",
       apply "nfbasistoalg" first, otherwise PARI will believe you are dealing with a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementup"(rnf,x)".

   rnfequation"(nf,pol,{flag = 0})"
       given a number field "nf" as output by "nfinit" (or simply a polynomial) and a polynomial
       pol with coefficients in "nf" defining a relative extension "L" of "nf", computes the
       absolute equation of "L" over Q.

       If "flag" is non-zero, outputs a 3-component row vector "[z,a,k]", where "z" is the
       absolute equation of "L" over Q, as in the default behaviour, "a" expresses as an element
       of "L" a root "alpha" of the polynomial defining the base field "nf", and "k" is a small
       integer such that "theta = beta+kalpha" where "theta" is a root of "z" and "beta" a root
       of "pol".

       The main variable of "nf" must be of lower priority than that of pol. Note that for
       efficiency, this does not check whether the relative equation is irreducible over "nf",
       but only if it is squarefree. If it is reducible but squarefree, the result will be the
       absolute equation of the etale algebra defined by pol. If pol is not squarefree, an error
       message will be issued.

       The library syntax is rnfequation0"(nf,pol,flag)".

   rnfhnfbasis"(bnf,x)"
       given a big number field "bnf" as output by "bnfinit", and either a polynomial "x" with
       coefficients in "bnf" defining a relative extension "L" of "bnf", or a pseudo-basis "x" of
       such an extension, gives either a true "bnf"-basis of "L" in upper triangular Hermite
       normal form, if it exists, zero otherwise.

       The library syntax is rnfhermitebasis"(nf,x)".

   rnfidealabstorel"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an ideal of the absolute extension "L/Q" given in HNF (if it is not, apply "idealhnf"
       first), computes the relative pseudomatrix in HNF giving the ideal "x" considered as an
       ideal of the relative extension "L/K".

       The library syntax is rnfidealabstorel"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealdown"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an ideal of the absolute extension "L/Q" given in HNF (if it is not, apply "idealhnf"
       first), gives the ideal of "K" below "x", i.e. the intersection of "x" with "K". Note
       that, if "x" is given as a relative ideal (i.e. a pseudomatrix in HNF), then it is not
       necessary to use this function since the result is simply the first ideal of the ideal
       list of the pseudomatrix.

       The library syntax is rnfidealdown"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealhnf"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being a
       relative ideal (which can be, as in the absolute case, of many different types, including
       of course elements), computes as a 2-component row vector the relative Hermite normal form
       of "x", the first component being the HNF matrix (with entries on the integral basis), and
       the second component the ideals.

       The library syntax is rnfidealhermite"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealmul"(rnf,x,y)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" and "y"
       being ideals of the relative extension "L/K" given by pseudo-matrices, outputs the ideal
       product, again as a relative ideal.

       The library syntax is rnfidealmul"(rnf,x,y)".

   rnfidealnormabs"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being a
       relative ideal (which can be, as in the absolute case, of many different types, including
       of course elements), computes the norm of the ideal "x" considered as an ideal of the
       absolute extension "L/Q". This is identical to "idealnorm(rnfidealnormrel(rnf,x))", only
       faster.

       The library syntax is rnfidealnormabs"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealnormrel"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being a
       relative ideal (which can be, as in the absolute case, of many different types, including
       of course elements), computes the relative norm of "x" as a ideal of "K" in HNF.

       The library syntax is rnfidealnormrel"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealreltoabs"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being a
       relative ideal (which can be, as in the absolute case, of many different types, including
       of course elements), computes the HNF matrix of the ideal "x" considered as an ideal of
       the absolute extension "L/Q".

       The library syntax is rnfidealreltoabs"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealtwoelt"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an ideal of the relative extension "L/K" given by a pseudo-matrix, gives a vector of two
       generators of "x" over "Z_L" expressed as polmods with polmod coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfidealtwoelement"(rnf,x)".

   rnfidealup"(rnf,x)"
       "rnf" being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by "rnfinit" and "x" being
       an ideal of "K", gives the ideal "xZ_L" as an absolute ideal of "L/Q" (the relative ideal
       representation is trivial: the matrix is the identity matrix, and the ideal list starts
       with "x", all the other ideals being "Z_K").

       The library syntax is rnfidealup"(rnf,x)".

   rnfinit"(nf,pol)"
       "nf" being a number field in "nfinit" format considered as base field, and pol a
       polynomial defining a relative extension over "nf", this computes all the necessary data
       to work in the relative extension. The main variable of pol must be of higher priority
       (i.e. lower number) than that of "nf", and the coefficients of pol must be in "nf".

       The result is an 11-component row vector as follows (most of the components are
       technical), the numbering being very close to that of "nfinit". In the following
       description, we let "K" be the base field defined by "nf", "m" the degree of the base
       field, "n" the relative degree, "L" the large field (of relative degree "n" or absolute
       degree "nm"), "r_1" and "r_2" the number of real and complex places of "K".

       "rnf[1]" contains the relative polynomial pol.

       "rnf[2]" is a row vector with "r_1+r_2" entries, entry "j" being a 2-component row vector
       "[r_{j,1},r_{j,2}]" where "r_{j,1}" and "r_{j,2}" are the number of real and complex
       places of "L" above the "j"-th place of "K" so that "r_{j,1} = 0" and "r_{j,2} = n" if "j"
       is a complex place, while if "j" is a real place we have "r_{j,1}+2r_{j,2} = n".

       "rnf[3]" is a two-component row vector "[d(L/K),s]" where "d(L/K)" is the relative ideal
       discriminant of "L/K" and "s" is the discriminant of "L/K" viewed as an element of
       "K^*/(K^*)^2", in other words it is the output of "rnfdisc".

       "rnf[4]" is the ideal index "f", i.e. such that "d(pol)Z_K = f^2d(L/K)".

       "rnf[5]" is a vector vm with 7 entries useful for certain computations in the relative
       extension "L/K". "vm[1]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2" matrices, the "j"-th matrix being an
       "(r_{1,j}+r_{2,j}) x n" matrix "M_j" representing the numerical values of the conjugates
       of the "j"-th embedding of the elements of the integral basis, where "r_{i,j}" is as in
       "rnf[2]". "vm[2]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2" matrices, the "j"-th matrix "MC_j" being
       essentially the conjugate of the matrix "M_j" except that the last "r_{2,j}" columns are
       also multiplied by 2.  "vm[3]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2" matrices "T2_j", where "T2_j" is
       an "n x n" matrix equal to the real part of the product "MC_j.M_j" (which is a real
       positive definite matrix). "vm[4]" is the "n x n" matrix "T" whose entries are the
       relative traces of "omega_iomega_j" expressed as polmods in "nf", where the "omega_i" are
       the elements of the relative integral basis. Note that the "j"-th embedding of "T" is
       equal to "\overline{MC_j}.M_j", and in particular will be equal to "T2_j" if "r_{2,j} =
       0". Note also that the relative ideal discriminant of "L/K" is equal to " det (T)" times
       the square of the product of the ideals in the relative pseudo-basis (in "rnf[7][2]"). The
       last 3 entries "vm[5]", "vm[6]" and "vm[7]" are linked to the different as in "nfinit",
       but have not yet been implemented.

       "rnf[6]" is a row vector with "r_1+r_2" entries, the "j"-th entry being the row vector
       with "r_{1,j}+r_{2,j}" entries of the roots of the "j"-th embedding of the relative
       polynomial pol.

       "rnf[7]" is a two-component row vector, where the first component is the relative integral
       pseudo basis expressed as polynomials (in the variable of "pol") with polmod coefficients
       in "nf", and the second component is the ideal list of the pseudobasis in HNF.

       "rnf[8]" is the inverse matrix of the integral basis matrix, with coefficients polmods in
       "nf".

       "rnf[9]" may be the multiplication table of the integral basis, but is not implemented at
       present.

       "rnf[10]" is "nf".

       "rnf[11]" is a vector vabs with 5 entries describing the absolute extension "L/Q".
       "vabs[1]" is an absolute equation.  "vabs[2]" expresses the generator "alpha" of the
       number field "nf" as a polynomial modulo the absolute equation "vabs[1]".  "vabs[3]" is a
       small integer "k" such that, if "beta" is an abstract root of pol and "alpha" the
       generator of "nf", the generator whose root is vabs will be "beta + k alpha". Note that
       one must be very careful if "k ! = 0" when dealing simultaneously with absolute and
       relative quantities since the generator chosen for the absolute extension is not the same
       as for the relative one. If this happens, one can of course go on working, but we strongly
       advise to change the relative polynomial so that its root will be "beta + k alpha".
       Typically, the GP instruction would be

       "pol = subst(pol, x, x - k*Mod(y,nf.pol))"

       Finally, "vabs[4]" is the absolute integral basis of "L" expressed in HNF (hence as would
       be output by "nfinit(vabs[1])"), and "vabs[5]" the inverse matrix of the integral basis,
       allowing to go from polmod to integral basis representation.

       The library syntax is rnfinitalg"(nf,pol,prec)".

   rnfisfree"(bnf,x)"
       given a big number field "bnf" as output by "bnfinit", and either a polynomial "x" with
       coefficients in "bnf" defining a relative extension "L" of "bnf", or a pseudo-basis "x" of
       such an extension, returns true (1) if "L/bnf" is free, false (0) if not.

       The library syntax is rnfisfree"(bnf,x)", and the result is a "long".

   rnfisnorm"(bnf,ext,el,{flag = 1})"
       similar to "bnfisnorm" but in the relative case. This tries to decide whether the element
       el in bnf is the norm of some "y" in ext.  "bnf" is as output by "bnfinit".

       "ext" is a relative extension which has to be a row vector whose components are:

       "ext[1]": a relative equation of the number field ext over bnf. As usual, the priority of
       the variable of the polynomial defining the ground field bnf (say "y") must be lower than
       the main variable of "ext[1]", say "x".

       "ext[2]": the generator "y" of the base field as a polynomial in "x" (as given by
       "rnfequation" with "flag = 1").

       "ext[3]": is the "bnfinit" of the absolute extension "ext/Q".

       This returns a vector "[a,b]", where "el = Norm(a)*b". It looks for a solution which is an
       "S"-integer, with "S" a list of places (of bnf) containing the ramified primes, the
       generators of the class group of ext, as well as those primes dividing el. If "ext/bnf" is
       known to be Galois, set "flag = 0" (here el is a norm iff "b = 1").  If "flag" is non zero
       add to "S" all the places above the primes which: divide "flag" if "flag < 0", or are less
       than "flag" if "flag > 0". The answer is guaranteed (i.e. el is a norm iff "b = 1") under
       GRH, if "S" contains all primes less than "12 log ^2|disc(Ext)|", where Ext is the normal
       closure of "ext / bnf". Example:

         bnf = bnfinit(y^3 + y^2 - 2*y - 1);
         p = x^2 + Mod(y^2 + 2*y + 1, bnf.pol);
         rnf = rnfequation(bnf,p,1);
         ext = [p, rnf[2], bnfinit(rnf[1])];
         rnfisnorm(bnf,ext,17, 1)

       checks whether 17 is a norm in the Galois extension "Q(beta) / Q(alpha)", where "alpha^3 +
       alpha^2 - 2alpha - 1 = 0" and "beta^2 + alpha^2 + 2*alpha + 1 = 0" (it is).

       The library syntax is rnfisnorm"(bnf,ext,x,flag,prec)".

   rnfkummer"(bnr,subgroup,{deg = 0})"
       bnr being as output by "bnrinit", finds a relative equation for the class field
       corresponding to the module in bnr and the given congruence subgroup. If deg is positive,
       outputs the list of all relative equations of degree deg contained in the ray class field
       defined by bnr.

       (THIS PROGRAM IS STILL IN DEVELOPMENT STAGE)

       The library syntax is rnfkummer"(bnr,subgroup,deg,prec)", where deg is a "long".

   rnflllgram"(nf,pol,order)"
       given a polynomial pol with coefficients in nf and an order order as output by
       "rnfpseudobasis" or similar, gives "[[neworder],U]", where neworder is a reduced order and
       "U" is the unimodular transformation matrix.

       The library syntax is rnflllgram"(nf,pol,order,prec)".

   rnfnormgroup"(bnr,pol)"
       bnr being a big ray class field as output by "bnrinit" and pol a relative polynomial
       defining an Abelian extension, computes the norm group (alias Artin or Takagi group)
       corresponding to the Abelian extension of "bnf = bnr[1]" defined by pol, where the module
       corresponding to bnr is assumed to be a multiple of the conductor (i.e. polrel defines a
       subextension of bnr). The result is the HNF defining the norm group on the given
       generators of "bnr[5][3]". Note that neither the fact that pol defines an Abelian
       extension nor the fact that the module is a multiple of the conductor is checked. The
       result is undefined if the assumption is not correct.

       The library syntax is rnfnormgroup"(bnr,pol)".

   rnfpolred"(nf,pol)"
       relative version of "polred".  Given a monic polynomial pol with coefficients in "nf",
       finds a list of relative polynomials defining some subfields, hopefully simpler and
       containing the original field. In the present version 2.2.0, this is slower than
       "rnfpolredabs".

       The library syntax is rnfpolred"(nf,pol,prec)".

   rnfpolredabs"(nf,pol,{flag = 0})"
       relative version of "polredabs". Given a monic polynomial pol with coefficients in "nf",
       finds a simpler relative polynomial defining the same field. If "flag = 1", returns
       "[P,a]" where "P" is the default output and "a" is an element expressed on a root of "P"
       whose characteristic polynomial is pol, if "flag = 2", returns an absolute polynomial
       (same as

       "rnfequation(nf,rnfpolredabs(nf,pol))"

       but faster).

       Remark. In the present implementation, this is both faster and much more efficient than
       "rnfpolred", the difference being more dramatic than in the absolute case. This is because
       the implementation of "rnfpolred" is based on (a partial implementation of) an incomplete
       reduction theory of lattices over number fields (i.e. the function "rnflllgram") which
       deserves to be improved.

       The library syntax is rnfpolredabs"(nf,pol,flag,prec)".

   rnfpseudobasis"(nf,pol)"
       given a number field "nf" as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with coefficients in
       "nf" defining a relative extension "L" of "nf", computes a pseudo-basis "(A,I)" and the
       relative discriminant of "L".  This is output as a four-element row vector "[A,I,D,d]",
       where "D" is the relative ideal discriminant and "d" is the relative discriminant
       considered as an element of "nf^*/{nf^*}^2".

       Note: As usual, "nf" can be a "bnf" as output by "bnfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfpseudobasis"(nf,pol)".

   rnfsteinitz"(nf,x)"
       given a number field "nf" as output by "nfinit" and either a polynomial "x" with
       coefficients in "nf" defining a relative extension "L" of "nf", or a pseudo-basis "x" of
       such an extension as output for example by "rnfpseudobasis", computes another pseudo-basis
       "(A,I)" (not in HNF in general) such that all the ideals of "I" except perhaps the last
       one are equal to the ring of integers of "nf", and outputs the four-component row vector
       "[A,I,D,d]" as in "rnfpseudobasis". The name of this function comes from the fact that the
       ideal class of the last ideal of "I" (which is well defined) is called the Steinitz class
       of the module "Z_L".

       Note: "nf" can be a "bnf" as output by "bnfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfsteinitz"(nf,x)".

   subgrouplist"(bnr,{bound},{flag = 0})"
       bnr being as output by "bnrinit" or a list of cyclic components of a finite Abelian group
       "G", outputs the list of subgroups of "G" (of index bounded by bound, if not omitted).
       Subgroups are given as HNF left divisors of the SNF matrix corresponding to "G". If "flag
       = 0" (default) and bnr is as output by "bnrinit", gives only the subgroups whose modulus
       is the conductor.

       The library syntax is subgrouplist0"(bnr,bound,flag,prec)", where bound, "flag" and "prec"
       are long integers.

   zetak"(znf,x,{flag = 0})"
       znf being a number field initialized by "zetakinit" (not by "nfinit"), computes the value
       of the Dedekind zeta function of the number field at the complex number "x". If "flag = 1"
       computes Dedekind "Lambda" function instead (i.e. the product of the Dedekind zeta
       function by its gamma and exponential factors).

       The accuracy of the result depends in an essential way on the accuracy of both the
       "zetakinit" program and the current accuracy, but even so the result may be off by up to 5
       or 10 decimal digits.

       The library syntax is glambdak"(znf,x,prec)" or "gzetak(znf,x,prec)".

   zetakinit"(x)"
       computes a number of initialization data concerning the number field defined by the
       polynomial "x" so as to be able to compute the Dedekind zeta and lambda functions
       (respectively zetak(x) and "zetak(x,1)"). This function calls in particular the "bnfinit"
       program. The result is a 9-component vector "v" whose components are very technical and
       cannot really be used by the user except through the "zetak" function. The only component
       which can be used if it has not been computed already is "v[1][4]" which is the result of
       the "bnfinit" call.

       This function is very inefficient and should be rewritten. It needs to computes millions
       of coefficients of the corresponding Dirichlet series if the precision is big. Unless the
       discriminant is small it will not be able to handle more than 9 digits of relative
       precision (e.g "zetakinit(x^8 - 2)" needs 440MB of memory at default precision).

       The library syntax is initzeta"(x)".

Polynomials and power series
       We group here all functions which are specific to polynomials or power series. Many other
       functions which can be applied on these objects are described in the other sections. Also,
       some of the functions described here can be applied to other types.

   O"(a""^""b)"
       "p"-adic (if "a" is an integer greater or equal to 2) or power series zero (in all other
       cases), with precision given by "b".

       The library syntax is ggrandocp"(a,b)", where "b" is a "long".

   deriv"(x,{v})"
       derivative of "x" with respect to the main variable if "v" is omitted, and with respect to
       "v" otherwise. "x" can be any type except polmod. The derivative of a scalar type is zero,
       and the derivative of a vector or matrix is done componentwise. One can use "x'" as a
       shortcut if the derivative is with respect to the main variable of "x".

       The library syntax is deriv"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long", and an omitted "v" is coded as
       "-1".

   eval"(x)"
       replaces in "x" the formal variables by the values that have been assigned to them after
       the creation of "x". This is mainly useful in GP, and not in library mode. Do not confuse
       this with substitution (see "subst"). Applying this function to a character string yields
       the output from the corresponding GP command, as if directly input from the keyboard (see
       "Label se:strings").

       The library syntax is geval"(x)". The more basic functions "poleval(q,x)", "qfeval(q,x)",
       and "hqfeval(q,x)" evaluate "q" at "x", where "q" is respectively assumed to be a
       polynomial, a quadratic form (a symmetric matrix), or an Hermitian form (an Hermitian
       complex matrix).

   factorpadic"(pol,p,r,{flag = 0})"
       "p"-adic factorization of the polynomial pol to precision "r", the result being a two-
       column matrix as in "factor". The factors are normalized so that their leading coefficient
       is a power of "p". "r" must be strictly larger than the "p"-adic valuation of the
       discriminant of pol for the result to make any sense. The method used is a modified
       version of the round 4 algorithm of Zassenhaus.

       If "flag = 1", use an algorithm due to Buchmann and Lenstra, which is usually less
       efficient.

       The library syntax is factorpadic4"(pol,p,r)", where "r" is a "long" integer.

   intformal"(x,{v})"
       formal integration of "x" with respect to the main variable if "v" is omitted, with
       respect to the variable "v" otherwise. Since PARI does not know about ``abstract''
       logarithms (they are immediately evaluated, if only to a power series), logarithmic terms
       in the result will yield an error. "x" can be of any type. When "x" is a rational
       function, it is assumed that the base ring is an integral domain of characteristic zero.

       The library syntax is integ"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted "v" is coded as
       "-1".

   padicappr"(pol,a)"
       vector of "p"-adic roots of the polynomial "pol" congruent to the "p"-adic number "a"
       modulo "p" (or modulo 4 if "p = 2"), and with the same "p"-adic precision as "a". The
       number "a" can be an ordinary "p"-adic number (type "t_PADIC", i.e. an element of "Q_p")
       or can be an element of a finite extension of "Q_p", in which case it is of type
       "t_POLMOD", where at least one of the coefficients of the polmod is a "p"-adic number. In
       this case, the result is the vector of roots belonging to the same extension of "Q_p" as
       "a".

       The library syntax is apprgen9"(pol,a)", but if "a" is known to be simply a "p"-adic
       number (type "t_PADIC"), the syntax "apprgen(pol,a)" can be used.

   polcoeff"(x,s,{v})"
       coefficient of degree "s" of the polynomial "x", with respect to the main variable if "v"
       is omitted, with respect to "v" otherwise.

       The library syntax is polcoeff0"(x,s,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted "v" is
       coded as "-1". Also available is truecoeff"(x,v)".

   poldegree"(x,{v})"
       degree of the polynomial "x" in the main variable if "v" is omitted, in the variable "v"
       otherwise. This is to be understood as follows. When "x" is a polynomial or a rational
       function, it gives the degree of "x", the degree of 0 being "-1" by convention. When "x"
       is a non-zero scalar, it gives 0, and when "x" is a zero scalar, it gives "-1". Return an
       error otherwise.

       The library syntax is poldegree"(x,v)", where "v" and the result are "long"s (and an
       omitted "v" is coded as "-1"). Also available is degree"(x)", which is equivalent to
       "poldegree(x,-1)".

   polcyclo"(n,{v = x})"
       "n"-th cyclotomic polynomial, in variable "v" ("x" by default). The integer "n" must be
       positive.

       The library syntax is cyclo"(n,v)", where "n" and "v" are "long" integers ("v" is a
       variable number, usually obtained through "varn").

   poldisc"(pol,{v})"
       discriminant of the polynomial pol in the main variable is "v" is omitted, in "v"
       otherwise. The algorithm used is the subresultant algorithm.

       The library syntax is poldisc0"(x,v)". Also available is discsr"(x)", equivalent to
       "poldisc0(x,-1)".

   poldiscreduced"(f)"
       reduced discriminant vector of the (integral, monic) polynomial "f". This is the vector of
       elementary divisors of "Z[alpha]/f'(alpha)Z[alpha]", where "alpha" is a root of the
       polynomial "f". The components of the result are all positive, and their product is equal
       to the absolute value of the discriminant of "f".

       The library syntax is reduceddiscsmith"(x)".

   polhensellift"(x, y, p, e)"
       given a vector "y" of polynomials that are pairwise relatively prime modulo the prime "p",
       and whose product is congruent to "x" modulo "p", lift the elements of "y" to polynomials
       whose product is congruent to "x" modulo "p^e".

       The library syntax is polhensellift"(x,y,p,e)" where "e" must be a "long".

   polinterpolate"(xa,{ya},{v = x},{&e})"
       given the data vectors "xa" and "ya" of the same length "n" ("xa" containing the
       "x"-coordinates, and "ya" the corresponding "y"-coordinates), this function finds the
       interpolating polynomial passing through these points and evaluates it at "v". If "ya" is
       omitted, return the polynomial interpolating the "(i,xa[i])". If present, "e" will contain
       an error estimate on the returned value.

       The library syntax is polint"(xa,ya,v,&e)", where "e" will contain an error estimate on
       the returned value.

   polisirreducible"(pol)"
       pol being a polynomial (univariate in the present version 2.2.0), returns 1 if pol is non-
       constant and irreducible, 0 otherwise. Irreducibility is checked over the smallest base
       field over which pol seems to be defined.

       The library syntax is gisirreducible"(pol)".

   pollead"(x,{v})"
       leading coefficient of the polynomial or power series "x". This is computed with respect
       to the main variable of "x" if "v" is omitted, with respect to the variable "v" otherwise.

       The library syntax is pollead"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted "v" is coded as
       "-1". Also available is leadingcoeff"(x)".

   pollegendre"(n,{v = x})"
       creates the "n^{th}" Legendre polynomial, in variable "v".

       The library syntax is legendre"(n)", where "x" is a "long".

   polrecip"(pol)"
       reciprocal polynomial of pol, i.e. the coefficients are in reverse order. pol must be a
       polynomial.

       The library syntax is polrecip"(x)".

   polresultant"(x,y,{v},{flag = 0})"
       resultant of the two polynomials "x" and "y" with exact entries, with respect to the main
       variables of "x" and "y" if "v" is omitted, with respect to the variable "v" otherwise.
       The algorithm used is the subresultant algorithm by default.

       If "flag = 1", uses the determinant of Sylvester's matrix instead (here "x" and "y" may
       have non-exact coefficients).

       If "flag = 2", uses Ducos's modified subresultant algorithm. It should be much faster than
       the default if the coefficient ring is complicated (e.g multivariate polynomials or huge
       coefficients), and slightly slower otherwise.

       The library syntax is polresultant0"(x,y,v,flag)", where "v" is a "long" and an omitted
       "v" is coded as "-1". Also available are "subres(x,y)" ("flag = 0") and "resultant2(x,y)"
       ("flag = 1").

   polroots"(pol,{flag = 0})"
       complex roots of the polynomial pol, given as a column vector where each root is repeated
       according to its multiplicity. The precision is given as for transcendental functions:
       under GP it is kept in the variable "realprecision" and is transparent to the user, but it
       must be explicitly given as a second argument in library mode.

       The algorithm used is a modification of A. Schoenhage's remarkable root-finding algorithm,
       due to and implemented by X. Gourdon. Barring bugs, it is guaranteed to converge and to
       give the roots to the required accuracy.

       If "flag = 1", use a variant of the Newton-Raphson method, which is not guaranteed to
       converge, but is rather fast. If you get the messages ``too many iterations in roots'' or
       ``INTERNAL ERROR: incorrect result in roots'', use the default function (i.e. no flag or
       "flag = 0"). This used to be the default root-finding function in PARI until version
       1.39.06.

       The library syntax is roots"(pol,prec)" or "rootsold(pol,prec)".

   polrootsmod"(pol,p,{flag = 0})"
       row vector of roots modulo "p" of the polynomial pol. The particular non-prime value "p =
       4" is accepted, mainly for 2-adic computations. Multiple roots are not repeated.

       If "p < 100", you may try setting "flag = 1", which uses a naive search. In this case,
       multiple roots are repeated with their order of multiplicity.

       The library syntax is rootmod"(pol,p)" ("flag = 0") or "rootmod2(pol,p)" ("flag = 1").

   polrootspadic"(pol,p,r)"
       row vector of "p"-adic roots of the polynomial pol with "p"-adic precision equal to "r".
       Multiple roots are not repeated. "p" is assumed to be a prime.

       The library syntax is rootpadic"(pol,p,r)", where "r" is a "long".

   polsturm"(pol,{a},{b})"
       number of real roots of the real polynomial pol in the interval "]a,b]", using Sturm's
       algorithm. "a" (resp. "b") is taken to be "- oo " (resp. "+ oo ") if omitted.

       The library syntax is sturmpart"(pol,a,b)". Use "NULL" to omit an argument.  sturm"(pol)"
       is equivalent to sturmpart"(pol,NULL,NULL)". The result is a "long".

   polsubcyclo"(n,d,{v = x})"
       gives a polynomial (in variable "v") defining the sub-Abelian extension of degree "d" of
       the cyclotomic field "Q(zeta_n)", where "d | phi(n)". "(Z/nZ)^*" has to be cyclic (i.e. "n
       = 2", 4, "p^k" or "2p^k" for an odd prime "p"). The function "galoissubcyclo" covers the
       general case.

       The library syntax is subcyclo"(n,d,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

   polsylvestermatrix"(x,y)"
       forms the Sylvester matrix corresponding to the two polynomials "x" and "y", where the
       coefficients of the polynomials are put in the columns of the matrix (which is the natural
       direction for solving equations afterwards). The use of this matrix can be essential when
       dealing with polynomials with inexact entries, since polynomial Euclidean division doesn't
       make much sense in this case.

       The library syntax is sylvestermatrix"(x,y)".

   polsym"(x,n)"
       creates the vector of the symmetric powers of the roots of the polynomial "x" up to power
       "n", using Newton's formula.

       The library syntax is polsym"(x)".

   poltchebi"(n,{v = x})"
       creates the "n^{th}" Chebyshev polynomial, in variable "v".

       The library syntax is tchebi"(n,v)", where "n" and "v" are "long" integers ("v" is a
       variable number).

   polzagier"(n,m)"
       creates Zagier's polynomial "P_{n,m}" used in the functions "sumalt" and "sumpos" (with
       "flag = 1"). The exact definition can be found in a forthcoming paper. One must have "m <=
       n".

       The library syntax is polzagreel"(n,m,prec)" if the result is only wanted as a polynomial
       with real coefficients to the precision "prec", or "polzag(n,m)" if the result is wanted
       exactly, where "n" and "m" are "long"s.

   serconvol"(x,y)"
       convolution (or Hadamard product) of the two power series "x" and "y"; in other words if
       "x = sum a_k*X^k" and "y = sum b_k*X^k" then "serconvol(x,y) = sum a_k*b_k*X^k".

       The library syntax is convol"(x,y)".

   serlaplace"(x)"
       "x" must be a power series with only non-negative exponents. If "x = sum (a_k/k!)*X^k"
       then the result is "sum a_k*X^k".

       The library syntax is laplace"(x)".

   serreverse"(x)"
       reverse power series (i.e. "x^{-1}", not "1/x") of "x". "x" must be a power series whose
       valuation is exactly equal to one.

       The library syntax is recip"(x)".

   subst"(x,y,z)"
       replace the simple variable "y" by the argument "z" in the ``polynomial'' expression "x".
       Every type is allowed for "x", but if it is not a genuine polynomial (or power series, or
       rational function), the substitution will be done as if the scalar components were
       polynomials of degree one. In particular, beware that:

         ? subst(1, x, [1,2; 3,4])
         %1 =
         [1 0]

         [0 1]

         ? subst(1, x, Mat([0,1]))
           ***   forbidden substitution by a non square matrix

       If "x" is a power series, "z" must be either a polynomial, a power series, or a rational
       function. "y" must be a simple variable name.

       The library syntax is gsubst"(x,v,z)", where "v" is the number of the variable "y".

   taylor"(x,y)"
       Taylor expansion around 0 of "x" with respect to the simple variable "y". "x" can be of
       any reasonable type, for example a rational function. The number of terms of the expansion
       is transparent to the user under GP, but must be given as a second argument in library
       mode.

       The library syntax is tayl"(x,y,n)", where the "long" integer "n" is the desired number of
       terms in the expansion.

   thue"(tnf,a,{sol})"
       solves the equation "P(x,y) = a" in integers "x" and "y", where tnf was created with
       thueinit(P). sol, if present, contains the solutions of "Norm(x) = a" modulo units of
       positive norm in the number field defined by "P" (as computed by "bnfisintnorm"). If tnf
       was computed without assuming GRH ("flag = 1" in "thueinit"), the result is unconditional.
       For instance, here's how to solve the Thue equation "x^{13} - 5y^{13} = - 4":

         ? tnf = thueinit(x^13 - 5);
         ? thue(tnf, -4)
         %1 = [[1, 1]]

       Hence, assuming GRH, the only solution is "x = 1", "y = 1".

       The library syntax is thue"(tnf,a,sol)", where an omitted sol is coded as "NULL".

   thueinit"(P,{flag = 0})"
       initializes the tnf corresponding to "P". It is meant to be used in conjunction with
       "thue" to solve Thue equations "P(x,y) = a", where "a" is an integer. If "flag" is non-
       zero, certify the result unconditionnaly, Otherwise, assume GRH, this being much faster of
       course.

       The library syntax is thueinit"(P,flag,prec)".

Vectors, matrices, linear algebra and sets
       Note that most linear algebra functions operating on subspaces defined by generating sets
       (such as "mathnf", "qflll", etc.) take matrices as arguments. As usual, the generating
       vectors are taken to be the columns of the given matrix.

   algdep"(x,k,{flag = 0})"
       "x" being real, complex, or "p"-adic, finds a polynomial of degree at most "k" with
       integer coefficients having "x" as approximate root. Note that the polynomial which is
       obtained is not necessarily the ``correct'' one (it's not even guaranteed to be
       irreducible!). One can check the closeness either by a polynomial evaluation or
       substitution, or by computing the roots of the polynomial given by algdep.

       If "x" is padic, "flag" is meaningless and the algorithm LLL-reduces the ``dual lattice''
       corresponding to the powers of "x".

       Otherwise, if "flag" is zero, the algorithm used is a variant of the LLL algorithm due to
       Hastad, Lagarias and Schnorr (STACS 1986). If the precision is too low, the routine may
       enter an infinite loop.

       If "flag" is non-zero, use a standard LLL. "flag" then indicates a precision, which should
       be between 0.5 and 1.0 times the number of decimal digits to which "x" was computed.

       The library syntax is algdep0"(x,k,flag,prec)", where "k" and "flag" are "long"s.  Also
       available is "algdep(x,k,prec)" ("flag = 0").

   charpoly"(A,{v = x},{flag = 0})"
       characteristic polynomial of "A" with respect to the variable "v", i.e. determinant of
       "v*I-A" if "A" is a square matrix, determinant of the map ``multiplication by "A"'' if "A"
       is a scalar, in particular a polmod (e.g. "charpoly(I,x) = x^2+1").  Note that in the
       latter case, the minimal polynomial can be obtained as

         minpoly(A)=
         {
           local(y);
           y = charpoly(A);
           y / gcd(y,y')
         }

       The value of "flag" is only significant for matrices.

       If "flag = 0", the method used is essentially the same as for computing the adjoint
       matrix, i.e. computing the traces of the powers of "A".

       If "flag = 1", uses Lagrange interpolation which is almost always slower.

       If "flag = 2", uses the Hessenberg form. This is faster than the default when the
       coefficients are integermod a prime or real numbers, but is usually slower in other base
       rings.

       The library syntax is charpoly0"(A,v,flag)", where "v" is the variable number. Also
       available are the functions "caract(A,v)" ("flag = 1"), "carhess(A,v)" ("flag = 2"), and
       "caradj(A,v,pt)" where, in this last case, pt is a "GEN*" which, if not equal to "NULL",
       will receive the address of the adjoint matrix of "A" (see "matadjoint"), so both can be
       obtained at once.

   concat"(x,{y})"
       concatenation of "x" and "y". If "x" or "y" is not a vector or matrix, it is considered as
       a one-dimensional vector. All types are allowed for "x" and "y", but the sizes must be
       compatible. Note that matrices are concatenated horizontally, i.e. the number of rows
       stays the same. Using transpositions, it is easy to concatenate them vertically.

       To concatenate vectors sideways (i.e. to obtain a two-row or two-column matrix), first
       transform the vector into a one-row or one-column matrix using the function "Mat".
       Concatenating a row vector to a matrix having the same number of columns will add the row
       to the matrix (top row if the vector is "x", i.e. comes first, and bottom row otherwise).

       The empty matrix "[;]" is considered to have a number of rows compatible with any
       operation, in particular concatenation. (Note that this is definitely not the case for
       empty vectors "[ ]" or "[ ]~".)

       If "y" is omitted, "x" has to be a row vector or a list, in which case its elements are
       concatenated, from left to right, using the above rules.

         ? concat([1,2], [3,4])
         %1 = [1, 2, 3, 4]
         ? a = [[1,2]~, [3,4]~]; concat(a)
         %2 = [1, 2, 3, 4]~
         ? a[1] = Mat(a[1]); concat(a)
         %3 =
         [1 3]

         [2 4]

         ? concat([1,2; 3,4], [5,6]~)
         %4 =
         [1 2 5]

         [3 4 6]
         ? concat([%, [7,8]~, [1,2,3,4]])
         %5 =
         [1 2 5 7]

         [3 4 6 8]

         [1 2 3 4]

       The library syntax is concat"(x,y)".

   lindep"(x,{flag = 0})"
       "x" being a vector with real or complex coefficients, finds a small integral linear
       combination among these coefficients.

       If "flag = 0", uses a variant of the LLL algorithm due to Hastad, Lagarias and Schnorr
       (STACS 1986).

       If "flag > 0", uses the LLL algorithm. "flag" is a parameter which should be between one
       half the number of decimal digits of precision and that number (see "algdep").

       If "flag < 0", returns as soon as one relation has been found.

       The library syntax is lindep0"(x,flag,prec)". Also available is "lindep(x,prec)" ("flag =
       0").

   listcreate"(n)"
       creates an empty list of maximal length "n".

       This function is useless in library mode.

   listinsert"(list,x,n)"
       inserts the object "x" at position "n" in list (which must be of type "t_LIST"). All the
       remaining elements of list (from position "n+1" onwards) are shifted to the right. This
       and "listput" are the only commands which enable you to increase a list's effective length
       (as long as it remains under the maximal length specified at the time of the
       "listcreate").

       This function is useless in library mode.

   listkill"(list)"
       kill list. This deletes all elements from list and sets its effective length to 0. The
       maximal length is not affected.

       This function is useless in library mode.

   listput"(list,x,{n})"
       sets the "n"-th element of the list list (which must be of type "t_LIST") equal to "x". If
       "n" is omitted, or greater than the list current effective length, just appends "x". This
       and "listinsert" are the only commands which enable you to increase a list's effective
       length (as long as it remains under the maximal length specified at the time of the
       "listcreate").

       If you want to put an element into an occupied cell, i.e. if you don't want to change the
       effective length, you can consider the list as a vector and use the usual "list[n] = x"
       construct.

       This function is useless in library mode.

   listsort"(list,{flag = 0})"
       sorts list (which must be of type "t_LIST") in place. If "flag" is non-zero, suppresses
       all repeated coefficients. This is much faster than the "vecsort" command since no copy
       has to be made.

       This function is useless in library mode.

   matadjoint"(x)"
       adjoint matrix of "x", i.e. the matrix "y" of cofactors of "x", satisfying "x*y =  det
       (x)*Id". "x" must be a (non-necessarily invertible) square matrix.

       The library syntax is adj"(x)".

   matcompanion"(x)"
       the left companion matrix to the polynomial "x".

       The library syntax is assmat"(x)".

   matdet"(x,{flag = 0})"
       determinant of "x". "x" must be a square matrix.

       If "flag = 0", uses Gauss-Bareiss.

       If "flag = 1", uses classical Gaussian elimination, which is better when the entries of
       the matrix are reals or integers for example, but usually much worse for more complicated
       entries like multivariate polynomials.

       The library syntax is det"(x)" ("flag = 0") and "det2(x)" ("flag = 1").

   matdetint"(x)"
       "x" being an "m x n" matrix with integer coefficients, this function computes a multiple
       of the determinant of the lattice generated by the columns of "x" if it is of rank "m",
       and returns zero otherwise. This function can be useful in conjunction with the function
       "mathnfmod" which needs to know such a multiple. Other ways to obtain this determinant
       (assuming the rank is maximal) is "matdet(qflll(x,4)[2]*x)" or more simply
       "matdet(mathnf(x))".  Experiment to see which is faster for your applications.

       The library syntax is detint"(x)".

   matdiagonal"(x)"
       "x" being a vector, creates the diagonal matrix whose diagonal entries are those of "x".

       The library syntax is diagonal"(x)".

   mateigen"(x)"
       gives the eigenvectors of "x" as columns of a matrix.

       The library syntax is eigen"(x)".

   mathess"(x)"
       Hessenberg form of the square matrix "x".

       The library syntax is hess"(x)".

   mathilbert"(x)"
       "x" being a "long", creates the Hilbert matrix of order "x", i.e. the matrix whose
       coefficient ("i","j") is "1/ (i+j-1)".  matrix"

       The library syntax is mathilbert"(x)".

   mathnf"(x,{flag = 0})"
       if "x" is a (not necessarily square) matrix of maximal rank, finds the upper triangular
       Hermite normal form of "x". If the rank of "x" is equal to its number of rows, the result
       is a square matrix. In general, the columns of the result form a basis of the lattice
       spanned by the columns of "x".

       If "flag = 0", uses the naive algorithm. If the Z-module generated by the columns is a
       lattice, it is recommanded to use "mathnfmod(x, matdetint(x))" instead (much faster).

       If "flag = 1", uses Batut's algorithm. Outputs a two-component row vector "[H,U]", where
       "H" is the upper triangular Hermite normal form of "x" (i.e. the default result) and "U"
       is the unimodular transformation matrix such that "xU = [0|H]". If the rank of "x" is
       equal to its number of rows, "H" is a square matrix. In general, the columns of "H" form a
       basis of the lattice spanned by the columns of "x".

       If "flag = 2", uses Havas's algorithm. Outputs "[H,U,P]", such that "H" and "U" are as
       before and "P" is a permutation of the rows such that "P" applied to "xU" gives "H". This
       does not work very well in present version 2.2.0.

       If "flag = 3", uses Batut's algorithm, and outputs "[H,U,P]" as in the previous case.

       If "flag = 4", as in case 1 above, but uses LLL reduction along the way.

       The library syntax is mathnf0"(x,flag)". Also available are "hnf(x)" ("flag = 0") and
       "hnfall(x)" ("flag = 1"). To reduce huge (say "400  x 400" and more) relation matrices
       (sparse with small entries), you can use the pair "hnfspec" / "hnfadd". Since this is
       rather technical and the calling interface may change, they are not documented yet. Look
       at the code in "basemath/alglin1.c".

   mathnfmod"(x,d)"
       if "x" is a (not necessarily square) matrix of maximal rank with integer entries, and "d"
       is a multiple of the (non-zero) determinant of the lattice spanned by the columns of "x",
       finds the upper triangular Hermite normal form of "x".

       If the rank of "x" is equal to its number of rows, the result is a square matrix. In
       general, the columns of the result form a basis of the lattice spanned by the columns of
       "x". This is much faster than "mathnf" when "d" is known.

       The library syntax is hnfmod"(x,d)".

   mathnfmodid"(x,d)"
       outputs the (upper triangular) Hermite normal form of "x" concatenated with "d" times the
       identity matrix.

       The library syntax is hnfmodid"(x,d)".

   matid"(n)"
       creates the "n x n" identity matrix.

       The library syntax is idmat"(n)" where "n" is a "long".

       Related functions are "gscalmat(x,n)", which creates "x" times the identity matrix ("x"
       being a "GEN" and "n" a "long"), and "gscalsmat(x,n)" which is the same when "x" is a
       "long".

   matimage"(x,{flag = 0})"
       gives a basis for the image of the matrix "x" as columns of a matrix. A priori the matrix
       can have entries of any type. If "flag = 0", use standard Gauss pivot. If "flag = 1", use
       "matsupplement".

       The library syntax is matimage0"(x,flag)". Also available is "image(x)" ("flag = 0").

   matimagecompl"(x)"
       gives the vector of the column indices which are not extracted by the function "matimage".
       Hence the number of components of matimagecompl(x) plus the number of columns of
       matimage(x) is equal to the number of columns of the matrix "x".

       The library syntax is imagecompl"(x)".

   matindexrank"(x)"
       "x" being a matrix of rank "r", gives two vectors "y" and "z" of length "r" giving a list
       of rows and columns respectively (starting from 1) such that the extracted matrix obtained
       from these two vectors using "vecextract(x,y,z)" is invertible.

       The library syntax is indexrank"(x)".

   matintersect"(x,y)"
       "x" and "y" being two matrices with the same number of rows each of whose columns are
       independent, finds a basis of the Q-vector space equal to the intersection of the spaces
       spanned by the columns of "x" and "y" respectively. See also the function
       "idealintersect", which does the same for free Z-modules.

       The library syntax is intersect"(x,y)".

   matinverseimage"(x,y)"
       gives a column vector belonging to the inverse image of the column vector "y" by the
       matrix "x" if one exists, the empty vector otherwise. To get the complete inverse image,
       it suffices to add to the result any element of the kernel of "x" obtained for example by
       "matker".

       The library syntax is inverseimage"(x,y)".

   matisdiagonal"(x)"
       returns true (1) if "x" is a diagonal matrix, false (0) if not.

       The library syntax is isdiagonal"(x)", and this returns a "long" integer.

   matker"(x,{flag = 0})"
       gives a basis for the kernel of the matrix "x" as columns of a matrix. A priori the matrix
       can have entries of any type.

       If "x" is known to have integral entries, set "flag = 1".

       Note: The library function "ker_mod_p(x, p)", where "x" has integer entries and "p" is
       prime, which is equivalent to but many orders of magnitude faster than
       "matker(x*Mod(1,p))" and needs much less stack space. To use it under GP, type
       "install(ker_mod_p, GG)" first.

       The library syntax is matker0"(x,flag)". Also available are "ker(x)" ("flag = 0"),
       "keri(x)" ("flag = 1") and "ker_mod_p(x,p)".

   matkerint"(x,{flag = 0})"
       gives an LLL-reduced Z-basis for the lattice equal to the kernel of the matrix "x" as
       columns of the matrix "x" with integer entries (rational entries are not permitted).

       If "flag = 0", uses a modified integer LLL algorithm.

       If "flag = 1", uses "matrixqz(x,-2)". If LLL reduction of the final result is not desired,
       you can save time using "matrixqz(matker(x),-2)" instead.

       If "flag = 2", uses another modified LLL. In the present version 2.2.0, only independent
       rows are allowed in this case.

       The library syntax is matkerint0"(x,flag)". Also available is "kerint(x)" ("flag = 0").

   matmuldiagonal"(x,d)"
       product of the matrix "x" by the diagonal matrix whose diagonal entries are those of the
       vector "d". Equivalent to, but much faster than "x*matdiagonal(d)".

       The library syntax is matmuldiagonal"(x,d)".

   matmultodiagonal"(x,y)"
       product of the matrices "x" and "y" knowing that the result is a diagonal matrix. Much
       faster than "x*y" in that case.

       The library syntax is matmultodiagonal"(x,y)".

   matpascal"(x,{q})"
       creates as a matrix the lower triangular Pascal triangle of order "x+1" (i.e. with
       binomial coefficients up to "x"). If "q" is given, compute the "q"-Pascal triangle
       (i.e. using "q"-binomial coefficients).

       The library syntax is matqpascal"(x,q)", where "x" is a "long" and "q = NULL" is used to
       omit "q". Also available is matpascal{x}.

   matrank"(x)"
       rank of the matrix "x".

       The library syntax is rank"(x)", and the result is a "long".

   matrix"(m,n,{X},{Y},{expr = 0})"
       creation of the "m x n" matrix whose coefficients are given by the expression expr. There
       are two formal parameters in expr, the first one ("X") corresponding to the rows, the
       second ("Y") to the columns, and "X" goes from 1 to "m", "Y" goes from 1 to "n". If one of
       the last 3 parameters is omitted, fill the matrix with zeroes.

       The library syntax is matrice"(GEN nlig,GEN ncol,entree *e1,entree *e2,char *expr)".

   matrixqz"(x,p)"
       "x" being an "m x n" matrix with "m >= n" with rational or integer entries, this function
       has varying behaviour depending on the sign of "p":

       If "p >= 0", "x" is assumed to be of maximal rank. This function returns a matrix having
       only integral entries, having the same image as "x", such that the GCD of all its "n x n"
       subdeterminants is equal to 1 when "p" is equal to 0, or not divisible by "p" otherwise.
       Here "p" must be a prime number (when it is non-zero). However, if the function is used
       when "p" has no small prime factors, it will either work or give the message ``impossible
       inverse modulo'' and a non-trivial divisor of "p".

       If "p = -1", this function returns a matrix whose columns form a basis of the lattice
       equal to "Z^n" intersected with the lattice generated by the columns of "x".

       If "p = -2", returns a matrix whose columns form a basis of the lattice equal to "Z^n"
       intersected with the Q-vector space generated by the columns of "x".

       The library syntax is matrixqz0"(x,p)".

   matsize"(x)"
       "x" being a vector or matrix, returns a row vector with two components, the first being
       the number of rows (1 for a row vector), the second the number of columns (1 for a column
       vector).

       The library syntax is matsize"(x)".

   matsnf"(X,{flag = 0})"
       if "X" is a (singular or non-singular) square matrix outputs the vector of elementary
       divisors of "X" (i.e. the diagonal of the Smith normal form of "X").

       The binary digits of flag mean:

       1 (complete output): if set, outputs "[U,V,D]", where "U" and "V" are two unimodular
       matrices such that "UXV" is the diagonal matrix "D". Otherwise output only the diagonal of
       "D".

       2 (generic input): if set, allows polynomial entries. Otherwise, assume that "X" has
       integer coefficients.

       4 (cleanup): if set, cleans up the output. This means that elementary divisors equal to 1
       will be deleted, i.e. outputs a shortened vector "D'" instead of "D". If complete output
       was required, returns "[U',V',D']" so that "U'XV' = D'" holds. If this flag is set, "X" is
       allowed to be of the form "D" or "[U,V,D]" as would normally be output with the cleanup
       flag unset.

       The library syntax is matsnf0"(X,flag)". Also available is "smith(X)" ("flag = 0").

   matsolve"(x,y)"
       "x" being an invertible matrix and "y" a column vector, finds the solution "u" of "x*u =
       y", using Gaussian elimination. This has the same effect as, but is a bit faster, than
       "x^{-1}*y".

       The library syntax is gauss"(x,y)".

   matsolvemod"(m,d,y,{flag = 0})"
       "m" being any integral matrix, "d" a vector of positive integer moduli, and "y" an
       integral column vector, gives a small integer solution to the system of congruences "sum_i
       m_{i,j}x_j = y_i (mod d_i)" if one exists, otherwise returns zero. Shorthand notation: "y"
       (resp. "d") can be given as a single integer, in which case all the "y_i" (resp. "d_i")
       above are taken to be equal to "y" (resp. "d").

       If "flag = 1", all solutions are returned in the form of a two-component row vector
       "[x,u]", where "x" is a small integer solution to the system of congruences and "u" is a
       matrix whose columns give a basis of the homogeneous system (so that all solutions can be
       obtained by adding "x" to any linear combination of columns of "u"). If no solution
       exists, returns zero.

       The library syntax is matsolvemod0"(m,d,y,flag)". Also available are "gaussmodulo(m,d,y)"
       ("flag = 0") and "gaussmodulo2(m,d,y)" ("flag = 1").

   matsupplement"(x)"
       assuming that the columns of the matrix "x" are linearly independent (if they are not, an
       error message is issued), finds a square invertible matrix whose first columns are the
       columns of "x", i.e. supplement the columns of "x" to a basis of the whole space.

       The library syntax is suppl"(x)".

   mattranspose"(x)" or "x~"
       transpose of "x".  This has an effect only on vectors and matrices.

       The library syntax is gtrans"(x)".

   qfgaussred"(q)"
       decomposition into squares of the quadratic form represented by the symmetric matrix "q".
       The result is a matrix whose diagonal entries are the coefficients of the squares, and the
       non-diagonal entries represent the bilinear forms. More precisely, if "(a_{ij})" denotes
       the output, one has

         " q(x) = sum_i a_{ii} (x_i + sum_{j > i} a_{ij} x_j)^2 "

       The library syntax is sqred"(x)".

   qfjacobi"(x)"
       "x" being a real symmetric matrix, this gives a vector having two components: the first
       one is the vector of eigenvalues of "x", the second is the corresponding orthogonal matrix
       of eigenvectors of "x". The method used is Jacobi's method for symmetric matrices.

       The library syntax is jacobi"(x)".

   qflll"(x,{flag = 0})"
       LLL algorithm applied to the columns of the (not necessarily square) matrix "x". The
       columns of "x" must however be linearly independent, unless specified otherwise below. The
       result is a transformation matrix "T" such that "x.T" is an LLL-reduced basis of the
       lattice generated by the column vectors of "x".

       If "flag = 0" (default), the computations are done with real numbers (i.e. not with
       rational numbers) hence are fast but as presently programmed (version 2.2.0) are
       numerically unstable.

       If "flag = 1", it is assumed that the corresponding Gram matrix is integral.  The
       computation is done entirely with integers and the algorithm is both accurate and quite
       fast. In this case, "x" needs not be of maximal rank, but if it is not, "T" will not be
       square.

       If "flag = 2", similar to case 1, except "x" should be an integer matrix whose columns are
       linearly independent. The lattice generated by the columns of "x" is first partially
       reduced before applying the LLL algorithm. [A basis is said to be partially reduced if
       "|v_i +- v_j| >= |v_i|" for any two distinct basis vectors "v_i,  v_j".]

       This can be significantly faster than "flag = 1" when one row is huge compared to the
       other rows.

       If "flag = 3", all computations are done in rational numbers. This does not incur
       numerical instability, but is extremely slow. This function is essentially superseded by
       case 1, so will soon disappear.

       If "flag = 4", "x" is assumed to have integral entries, but needs not be of maximal rank.
       The result is a two-component vector of matrices : the columns of the first matrix
       represent a basis of the integer kernel of "x" (not necessarily LLL-reduced) and the
       second matrix is the transformation matrix "T" such that "x.T" is an LLL-reduced Z-basis
       of the image of the matrix "x".

       If "flag = 5", case as case 4, but "x" may have polynomial coefficients.

       If "flag = 7", uses an older version of case 0 above.

       If "flag = 8", same as case 0, where "x" may have polynomial coefficients.

       If "flag = 9", variation on case 1, using content.

       The library syntax is qflll0"(x,flag,prec)". Also available are "lll(x,prec)" ("flag =
       0"), "lllint(x)" ("flag = 1"), and "lllkerim(x)" ("flag = 4").

   qflllgram"(x,{flag = 0})"
       same as "qflll" except that the matrix "x" which must now be a square symmetric real
       matrix is the Gram matrix of the lattice vectors, and not the coordinates of the vectors
       themselves. The result is again the transformation matrix "T" which gives (as columns) the
       coefficients with respect to the initial basis vectors. The flags have more or less the
       same meaning, but some are missing. In brief:

       "flag = 0": numerically unstable in the present version 2.2.0.

       "flag = 1": "x" has integer entries, the computations are all done in integers.

       "flag = 4": "x" has integer entries, gives the kernel and reduced image.

       "flag = 5": same as 4 for generic "x".

       "flag = 7": an older version of case 0.

       The library syntax is qflllgram0"(x,flag,prec)". Also available are "lllgram(x,prec)"
       ("flag = 0"), "lllgramint(x)" ("flag = 1"), and "lllgramkerim(x)" ("flag = 4").

   qfminim"(x,b,m,{flag = 0})"
       "x" being a square and symmetric matrix representing a positive definite quadratic form,
       this function deals with the minimal vectors of "x", depending on "flag".

       If "flag = 0" (default), seeks vectors of square norm less than or equal to "b" (for the
       norm defined by "x"), and at most "2m" of these vectors. The result is a three-component
       vector, the first component being the number of vectors, the second being the maximum norm
       found, and the last vector is a matrix whose columns are the vectors found, only one being
       given for each pair "+- v" (at most "m" such pairs).

       If "flag = 1", ignores "m" and returns the first vector whose norm is less than "b".

       In both these cases, "x" is assumed to have integral entries, and the function searches
       for the minimal non-zero vectors whenever "b = 0".

       If "flag = 2", "x" can have non integral real entries, but "b = 0" is now meaningless
       (uses Fincke-Pohst algorithm).

       The library syntax is qfminim0"(x,b,m,flag,prec)", also available are " minim(x,b,m)"
       ("flag = 0"), " minim2(x,b,m)" ("flag = 1"), and finally " fincke_pohst(x,b,m,prec)"
       ("flag = 2").

   qfperfection"(x)"
       "x" being a square and symmetric matrix with integer entries representing a positive
       definite quadratic form, outputs the perfection rank of the form. That is, gives the rank
       of the family of the "s" symmetric matrices "v_iv_i^t", where "s" is half the number of
       minimal vectors and the "v_i" ("1 <= i <= s") are the minimal vectors.

       As a side note to old-timers, this used to fail bluntly when "x" had more than 5000
       minimal vectors. Beware that the computations can now be very lengthy when "x" has many
       minimal vectors.

       The library syntax is perf"(x)".

   qfsign"(x)"
       signature of the quadratic form represented by the symmetric matrix "x". The result is a
       two-component vector.

       The library syntax is signat"(x)".

   setintersect"(x,y)"
       intersection of the two sets "x" and "y".

       The library syntax is setintersect"(x,y)".

   setisset"(x)"
       returns true (1) if "x" is a set, false (0) if not. In PARI, a set is simply a row vector
       whose entries are strictly increasing. To convert any vector (and other objects) into a
       set, use the function "Set".

       The library syntax is setisset"(x)", and this returns a "long".

   setminus"(x,y)"
       difference of the two sets "x" and "y", i.e. set of elements of "x" which do not belong to
       "y".

       The library syntax is setminus"(x,y)".

   setsearch"(x,y,{flag = 0})"
       searches if "y" belongs to the set "x". If it does and "flag" is zero or omitted, returns
       the index "j" such that "x[j] = y", otherwise returns 0. If "flag" is non-zero returns the
       index "j" where "y" should be inserted, and 0 if it already belongs to "x" (this is meant
       to be used in conjunction with "listinsert").

       This function works also if "x" is a sorted list (see "listsort").

       The library syntax is setsearch"(x,y,flag)" which returns a "long" integer.

   setunion"(x,y)"
       union of the two sets "x" and "y".

       The library syntax is setunion"(x,y)".

   trace"(x)"
       this applies to quite general "x". If "x" is not a matrix, it is equal to the sum of "x"
       and its conjugate, except for polmods where it is the trace as an algebraic number.

       For "x" a square matrix, it is the ordinary trace. If "x" is a non-square matrix (but not
       a vector), an error occurs.

       The library syntax is gtrace"(x)".

   vecextract"(x,y,{z})"
       extraction of components of the vector or matrix "x" according to "y". In case "x" is a
       matrix, its components are as usual the columns of "x". The parameter "y" is a component
       specifier, which is either an integer, a string describing a range, or a vector.

       If "y" is an integer, it is considered as a mask: the binary bits of "y" are read from
       right to left, but correspond to taking the components from left to right. For example, if
       "y = 13 = (1101)_2" then the components 1,3 and 4 are extracted.

       If "y" is a vector, which must have integer entries, these entries correspond to the
       component numbers to be extracted, in the order specified.

       If "y" is a string, it can be

       "*" a single (non-zero) index giving a component number (a negative index means we start
       counting from the end).

       "*" a range of the form "a..b", where "a" and "b" are indexes as above. Any of "a" and "b"
       can be omitted; in this case, we take as default values "a = 1" and "b = -1", i.e. the
       first and last components respectively. We then extract all components in the interval
       "[a,b]", in reverse order if "b < a".

       In addition, if the first character in the string is "^", the complement of the given set
       of indices is taken.

       If "z" is not omitted, "x" must be a matrix. "y" is then the line specifier, and "z" the
       column specifier, where the component specifier is as explained above.

         ? v = [a, b, c, d, e];
         ? vecextract(v, 5)          \\ mask
         %1 = [a, c]
         ? vecextract(v, [4, 2, 1])  \\ component list
         %2 = [d, b, a]
         ? vecextract(v, "2..4")     \\ interval
         %3 = [b, c, d]
         ? vecextract(v, "-1..-3")   \\ interval + reverse order
         %4 = [e, d, c]
         ? vecextract([1,2,3], "^2") \\ complement
         %5 = [1, 3]
         ? vecextract(matid(3), "2..", "..")
         %6 =
         [0 1 0]

         [0 0 1]

       The library syntax is extract"(x,y)" or "matextract(x,y,z)".

   vecsort"(x,{k},{flag = 0})"
       sorts the vector "x" in ascending order, using the heapsort method. "x" must be a vector,
       and its components integers, reals, or fractions.

       If "k" is present and is an integer, sorts according to the value of the "k"-th
       subcomponents of the components of "x". "k" can also be a vector, in which case the
       sorting is done lexicographically according to the components listed in the vector "k".
       For example, if "k = [2,1,3]", sorting will be done with respect to the second component,
       and when these are equal, with respect to the first, and when these are equal, with
       respect to the third.

       The binary digits of flag mean:

       "*" 1: indirect sorting of the vector "x", i.e. if "x" is an "n"-component vector, returns
       a permutation of "[1,2,...,n]" which applied to the components of "x" sorts "x" in
       increasing order.  For example, "vecextract(x, vecsort(x,,1))" is equivalent to
       vecsort(x).

       "*" 2: sorts "x" by ascending lexicographic order (as per the "lex" comparison function).

       "*" 4: use decreasing instead of ascending order.

       The library syntax is vecsort0"(x,k,flag)". To omit "k", use "NULL" instead. You can also
       use the simpler functions

       "sort(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,0)").

       "indexsort(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,1)").

       "lexsort(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,2)").

       Also available are sindexsort and sindexlexsort which return a vector of C-long integers
       (private type "t_VECSMALL") "v", where "v[1]...v[n]" contain the indices. Note that the
       resulting "v" is not a generic PARI object, but is in general easier to use in C programs!

   vector"(n,{X},{expr = 0})"
       creates a row vector (type "t_VEC") with "n" components whose components are the
       expression expr evaluated at the integer points between 1 and "n". If one of the last two
       arguments is omitted, fill the vector with zeroes.

       The library syntax is vecteur"(GEN nmax, entree *ep, char *expr)".

   vectorv"(n,X,expr)"
       as vector, but returns a column vector (type "t_COL").

       The library syntax is vvecteur"(GEN nmax, entree *ep, char *expr)".

Sums, products, integrals and similar functions
       Although the GP calculator is programmable, it is useful to have preprogrammed a number of
       loops, including sums, products, and a certain number of recursions. Also, a number of
       functions from numerical analysis like numerical integration and summation of series will
       be described here.

       One of the parameters in these loops must be the control variable, hence a simple variable
       name. The last parameter can be any legal PARI expression, including of course expressions
       using loops. Since it is much easier to program directly the loops in library mode, these
       functions are mainly useful for GP programming. The use of these functions in library mode
       is a little tricky and its explanation will be mostly omitted, although the reader can try
       and figure it out by himself by checking the example given for the "sum" function. In this
       section we only give the library syntax, with no semantic explanation.

       The letter "X" will always denote any simple variable name, and represents the formal
       parameter used in the function.

       (numerical) integration: A number of Romberg-like integration methods are implemented (see
       "intnum" as opposed to "intformal" which we already described). The user should not
       require too much accuracy: 18 or 28 decimal digits is OK, but not much more.  In addition,
       analytical cleanup of the integral must have been done: there must be no singularities in
       the interval or at the boundaries. In practice this can be accomplished with a simple
       change of variable. Furthermore, for improper integrals, where one or both of the limits
       of integration are plus or minus infinity, the function must decrease sufficiently rapidly
       at infinity. This can often be accomplished through integration by parts.  Finally, the
       function to be integrated should not be very small (compared to the current precision) on
       the entire interval. This can of course be accomplished by just multiplying by an
       appropriate constant.

       Note that infinity can be represented with essentially no loss of accuracy by 1e4000.
       However beware of real underflow when dealing with rapidly decreasing functions. For
       example, if one wants to compute the "int_0^ oo e^{-x^2}dx" to 28 decimal digits, then one
       should set infinity equal to 10 for example, and certainly not to 1e4000.

       The integrand may have values belonging to a vector space over the real numbers; in
       particular, it can be complex-valued or vector-valued.

       See also the discrete summation methods below (sharing the prefix "sum").

   intnum"(X = a,b,expr,{flag = 0})"
       numerical integration of expr (smooth in "]a,b["), with respect to "X".

       Set "flag = 0" (or omit it altogether) when "a" and "b" are not too large, the function is
       smooth, and can be evaluated exactly everywhere on the interval "[a,b]".

       If "flag = 1", uses a general driver routine for doing numerical integration, making no
       particular assumption (slow).

       "flag = 2" is tailored for being used when "a" or "b" are infinite. One must have "ab >
       0", and in fact if for example "b = + oo ", then it is preferable to have "a" as large as
       possible, at least "a >= 1".

       If "flag = 3", the function is allowed to be undefined (but continuous) at "a" or "b", for
       example the function " sin (x)/x" at "x = 0".

       The library syntax is intnum0"(entree*e,GEN a,GEN b,char*expr,long flag,long prec)".

   prod"(X = a,b,expr,{x = 1})"
       product of expression expr, initialized at "x", the formal parameter "X" going from "a" to
       "b". As for "sum", the main purpose of the initialization parameter "x" is to force the
       type of the operations being performed. For example if it is set equal to the integer 1,
       operations will start being done exactly. If it is set equal to the real 1., they will be
       done using real numbers having the default precision. If it is set equal to the power
       series "1+O(X^k)" for a certain "k", they will be done using power series of precision at
       most "k". These are the three most common initializations.

       As an extreme example, compare

         ? prod(i=1, 100, 1 - X^i);  \\ this has degree 5050 !!
         time = 3,335 ms.
         ? prod(i=1, 100, 1 - X^i, 1 + O(X^101))
         time = 43 ms.
         %2 = 1 - X - X^2 + X^5 + X^7 - X^12 - X^15 + X^22 + X^26 - X^35 - X^40 + \
           X^51 + X^57 - X^70 - X^77 + X^92 + X^100 + O(X^101)

       The library syntax is produit"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr, GEN x)".

   prodeuler"(X = a,b,expr)"
       product of expression expr, initialized at 1. (i.e. to a real number equal to 1 to the
       current "realprecision"), the formal parameter "X" ranging over the prime numbers between
       "a" and "b".

       The library syntax is prodeuler"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr, long prec)".

   prodinf"(X = a,expr,{flag = 0})"
       infinite product of expression expr, the formal parameter "X" starting at "a". The
       evaluation stops when the relative error of the expression minus 1 is less than the
       default precision. The expressions must always evaluate to an element of C.

       If "flag = 1", do the product of the ("1+expr") instead.

       The library syntax is prodinf"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long prec)" ("flag = 0"), or
       prodinf1 with the same arguments ("flag = 1").

   solve"(X = a,b,expr)"
       find a real root of expression expr between "a" and "b", under the condition "expr(X = a)
       * expr(X = b) <= 0".  This routine uses Brent's method and can fail miserably if expr is
       not defined in the whole of "[a,b]" (try "solve(x = 1, 2, tan(x)").

       The library syntax is zbrent"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr, long prec)".

   sum"(X = a,b,expr,{x = 0})"
       sum of expression expr, initialized at "x", the formal parameter going from "a" to "b". As
       for "prod", the initialization parameter "x" may be given to force the type of the
       operations being performed.

       As an extreme example, compare

         ? sum(i=1, 5000, 1/i); \\ rational number: denominator has 2166 digits.
         time = 1,241 ms.
         ? sum(i=1, 5000, 1/i, 0.)
         time = 158 ms.
         %2 = 9.094508852984436967261245533

       The library syntax is somme"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr, GEN x)". This is to be
       used as follows: "ep" represents the dummy variable used in the expression "expr"

         /* compute a^2 + ... + b^2 */
         {
           /* define the dummy variable "i" */
           entree *ep = is_entry("i");
           /* sum for a <= i <= b */
           return somme(ep, a, b, "i^2", gzero);
         }

   sumalt"(X = a,expr,{flag = 0})"
       numerical summation of the series expr, which should be an alternating series, the formal
       variable "X" starting at "a".

       If "flag = 0", use an algorithm of F. Villegas as modified by D. Zagier. This is much
       better than Euler-Van Wijngaarden's method which was used formerly.  Beware that the
       stopping criterion is that the term gets small enough, hence terms which are equal to 0
       will create problems and should be removed.

       If "flag = 1", use a variant with slightly different polynomials. Sometimes faster.

       Divergent alternating series can sometimes be summed by this method, as well as series
       which are not exactly alternating (see for example "Label se:user_defined").

       Important hint: a significant speed gain can be obtained by writing the "(-1)^X" which may
       occur in the expression as "(1. - X%2*2)".

       The library syntax is sumalt"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long flag, long prec)".

   sumdiv"(n,X,expr)"
       sum of expression expr over the positive divisors of "n".

       Arithmetic functions like sigma use the multiplicativity of the underlying expression to
       speed up the computation. In the present version 2.2.0, there is no way to indicate that
       expr is multiplicative in "n", hence specialized functions should be prefered whenever
       possible.

       The library syntax is divsum"(entree *ep, GEN num, char *expr)".

   suminf"(X = a,expr)"
       infinite sum of expression expr, the formal parameter "X" starting at "a". The evaluation
       stops when the relative error of the expression is less than the default precision.  The
       expressions must always evaluate to a complex number.

       The library syntax is suminf"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long prec)".

   sumpos"(X = a,expr,{flag = 0})"
       numerical summation of the series expr, which must be a series of terms having the same
       sign, the formal variable "X" starting at "a". The algorithm used is Van Wijngaarden's
       trick for converting such a series into an alternating one, and is quite slow.  Beware
       that the stopping criterion is that the term gets small enough, hence terms which are
       equal to 0 will create problems and should be removed.

       If "flag = 1", use slightly different polynomials. Sometimes faster.

       The library syntax is sumpos"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long flag, long prec)".

Plotting functions
       Although plotting is not even a side purpose of PARI, a number of plotting functions are
       provided. Moreover, a lot of people felt like suggesting ideas or submitting huge patches
       for this section of the code. Among these, special thanks go to Klaus-Peter Nischke who
       suggested the recursive plotting and the forking/resizing stuff under X11, and Ilya
       Zakharevich who undertook a complete rewrite of the graphic code, so that most of it is
       now platform-independent and should be relatively easy to port or expand.

       These graphic functions are either

       "*" high-level plotting functions (all the functions starting with "ploth") in which the
       user has little to do but explain what type of plot he wants, and whose syntax is similar
       to the one used in the preceding section (with somewhat more complicated flags).

       "*" low-level plotting functions, where every drawing primitive (point, line, box, etc.)
       must be specified by the user. These low-level functions (called rectplot functions,
       sharing the prefix "plot") work as follows. You have at your disposal 16 virtual windows
       which are filled independently, and can then be physically ORed on a single window at
       user-defined positions. These windows are numbered from 0 to 15, and must be initialized
       before being used by the function "plotinit", which specifies the height and width of the
       virtual window (called a rectwindow in the sequel). At all times, a virtual cursor
       (initialized at "[0,0]") is associated to the window, and its current value can be
       obtained using the function "plotcursor".

       A number of primitive graphic objects (called rect objects) can then be drawn in these
       windows, using a default color associated to that window (which can be changed under X11,
       using the "plotcolor" function, black otherwise) and only the part of the object which is
       inside the window will be drawn, with the exception of polygons and strings which are
       drawn entirely (but the virtual cursor can move outside of the window). The ones sharing
       the prefix "plotr" draw relatively to the current position of the virtual cursor, the
       others use absolute coordinates. Those having the prefix "plotrecth" put in the rectwindow
       a large batch of rect objects corresponding to the output of the related "ploth" function.

       Finally, the actual physical drawing is done using the function "plotdraw". Note that the
       windows are preserved so that further drawings using the same windows at different
       positions or different windows can be done without extra work. If you want to erase a
       window (and free the corresponding memory), use the function "plotkill". It is not
       possible to partially erase a window. Erase it completely, initialize it again and then
       fill it with the graphic objects that you want to keep.

       In addition to initializing the window, you may want to have a scaled window to avoid
       unnecessary conversions. For this, use the function "plotscale" below. As long as this
       function is not called, the scaling is simply the number of pixels, the origin being at
       the upper left and the "y"-coordinates going downwards.

       Note that in the present version 2.2.0 all these plotting functions (both low and high
       level) have been written for the X11-window system (hence also for GUI's based on X11 such
       as Openwindows and Motif) only, though very little code remains which is actually
       platform-dependent. A Suntools/Sunview, Macintosh, and an Atari/Gem port were provided for
       previous versions. These may be adapted in future releases.

       Under X11/Suntools, the physical window (opened by "plotdraw" or any of the "ploth*"
       functions) is completely separated from GP (technically, a "fork" is done, and the non-
       graphical memory is immediately freed in the child process), which means you can go on
       working in the current GP session, without having to kill the window first. Under X11,
       this window can be closed, enlarged or reduced using the standard window manager
       functions.  No zooming procedure is implemented though (yet).

       "*" Finally, note that in the same way that "printtex" allows you to have a TeX output
       corresponding to printed results, the functions starting with "ps" allow you to have
       "PostScript" output of the plots. This will not be absolutely identical with the screen
       output, but will be sufficiently close. Note that you can use PostScript output even if
       you do not have the plotting routines enabled. The PostScript output is written in a file
       whose name is derived from the "psfile" default ("./pari.ps" if you did not tamper with
       it). Each time a new PostScript output is asked for, the PostScript output is appended to
       that file. Hence the user must remove this file, or change the value of "psfile", first if
       he does not want unnecessary drawings from preceding sessions to appear. On the other
       hand, in this manner as many plots as desired can be kept in a single file.

       None of the graphic functions are available within the PARI library, you must be under GP
       to use them. The reason for that is that you really should not use PARI for heavy-duty
       graphical work, there are much better specialized alternatives around. This whole set of
       routines was only meant as a convenient, but simple-minded, visual aid. If you really
       insist on using these in your program (we warned you), the source ("plot*.c") should be
       readable enough for you to achieve something.

   plot"(X = a,b,expr,{Ymin},{Ymax})"
       crude (ASCII) plot of the function represented by expression expr from "a" to "b", with Y
       ranging from Ymin to Ymax. If Ymin (resp. Ymax) is not given, the minima (resp. the
       maxima) of the computed values of the expression is used instead.

   plotbox"(w,x2,y2)"
       let "(x1,y1)" be the current position of the virtual cursor. Draw in the rectwindow "w"
       the outline of the rectangle which is such that the points "(x1,y1)" and "(x2,y2)" are
       opposite corners. Only the part of the rectangle which is in "w" is drawn. The virtual
       cursor does not move.

   plotclip"(w)"
       `clips' the content of rectwindow "w", i.e remove all parts of the drawing that would not
       be visible on the screen.  Together with "plotcopy" this function enables you to draw on a
       scratchpad before commiting the part you're interested in to the final picture.

   plotcolor"(w,c)"
       set default color to "c" in rectwindow "w".  In present version 2.2.0, this is only
       implemented for X11 window system, and you only have the following palette to choose from:

       1 = black, 2 = blue, 3 = sienna, 4 = red, 5 = cornsilk, 6 = grey, 7 = gainsborough.

       Note that it should be fairly easy for you to hardwire some more colors by tweaking the
       files "rect.h" and "plotX.c". User-defined colormaps would be nice, and may be available
       in future versions.

   plotcopy"(w1,w2,dx,dy)"
       copy the contents of rectwindow "w1" to rectwindow "w2", with offset "(dx,dy)".

   plotcursor"(w)"
       give as a 2-component vector the current (scaled) position of the virtual cursor
       corresponding to the rectwindow "w".

   plotdraw"(list)"
       physically draw the rectwindows given in "list" which must be a vector whose number of
       components is divisible by 3. If "list = [w1,x1,y1,w2,x2,y2,...]", the windows "w1", "w2",
       etc. are physically placed with their upper left corner at physical position "(x1,y1)",
       "(x2,y2)",...respectively, and are then drawn together.  Overlapping regions will thus be
       drawn twice, and the windows are considered transparent. Then display the whole drawing in
       a special window on your screen.

   plotfile"(s)"
       set the output file for plotting output. Special filename "-" redirects to the same place
       as PARI output.

   ploth"(X = a,b,expr,{flag = 0},{n = 0})"
       high precision plot of the function "y = f(x)" represented by the expression expr, "x"
       going from "a" to "b". This opens a specific window (which is killed whenever you click on
       it), and returns a four-component vector giving the coordinates of the bounding box in the
       form "[xmin,xmax,ymin,ymax]".

       Important note: Since this may involve a lot of function calls, it is advised to keep the
       current precision to a minimum (e.g. 9) before calling this function.

       "n" specifies the number of reference point on the graph (0 means use the hardwired
       default values, that is: 1000 for general plot, 1500 for parametric plot, and 15 for
       recursive plot).

       If no "flag" is given, expr is either a scalar expression f(X), in which case the plane
       curve "y = f(X)" will be drawn, or a vector "[f_1(X),...,f_k(X)]", and then all the curves
       "y = f_i(X)" will be drawn in the same window.

       The binary digits of "flag" mean:

       "*" 1: parametric plot. Here expr must be a vector with an even number of components.
       Successive pairs are then understood as the parametric coordinates of a plane curve. Each
       of these are then drawn.

       For instance:

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[sin(X),cos(X)],1)" will draw a circle.

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[sin(X),cos(X)])" will draw two entwined sinusoidal curves.

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[X,X,sin(X),cos(X)],1)" will draw a circle and the line "y = x".

       "*" 2: recursive plot. If this flag is set, only one curve can be drawn at time, i.e. expr
       must be either a two-component vector (for a single parametric curve, and the parametric
       flag has to be set), or a scalar function. The idea is to choose pairs of successive
       reference points, and if their middle point is not too far away from the segment joining
       them, draw this as a local approximation to the curve.  Otherwise, add the middle point to
       the reference points. This is very fast, and usually more precise than usual plot. Compare
       the results of

         "ploth(X = -1,1,sin(1/X),2)  and  ploth(X = -1,1,sin(1/X))"

       for instance. But beware that if you are extremely unlucky, or choose too few reference
       points, you may draw some nice polygon bearing little resemblance to the original curve.
       For instance you should never plot recursively an odd function in a symmetric interval
       around 0. Try

           ploth(x = -20, 20, sin(x), 2)

       to see why. Hence, it's usually a good idea to try and plot the same curve with slightly
       different parameters.

       The other values toggle various display options:

       "*" 4: do not rescale plot according to the computed extrema. This is meant to be used
       when graphing multiple functions on a rectwindow (as a "plotrecth" call), in conjuction
       with "plotscale".

       "*" 8: do not print the "x"-axis.

       "*" 16: do not print the "y"-axis.

       "*" 32: do not print frame.

       "*" 64: only plot reference points, do not join them.

       "*" 256: use splines to interpolate the points.

       "*" 512: plot no "x"-ticks.

       "*" 1024: plot no "y"-ticks.

       "*" 2048: plot all ticks with the same length.

   plothraw"(listx,listy,{flag = 0})"
       given listx and listy two vectors of equal length, plots (in high precision) the points
       whose "(x,y)"-coordinates are given in listx and listy. Automatic positioning and scaling
       is done, but with the same scaling factor on "x" and "y". If "flag" is 1, join points,
       other non-0 flags toggle display options and should be combinations of bits "2^k", "k
        >= 3" as in "ploth".

   plothsizes"()"
       return data corresponding to the output window in the form of a 6-component vector: window
       width and height, sizes for ticks in horizontal and vertical directions (this is intended
       for the "gnuplot" interface and is currently not significant), width and height of
       characters.

   plotinit"(w,x,y)"
       initialize the rectwindow "w" to width "x" and height "y", and position the virtual cursor
       at "(0,0)". This destroys any rect objects you may have already drawn in "w".

       The plotting device imposes an upper bound for "x" and "y", for instance the number of
       pixels for screen output. These bounds are available through the "plothsizes" function.
       The following sequence initializes in a portable way (i.e independant of the output
       device) a window of maximal size, accessed through coordinates in the "[0,1000]  x
       [0,1000]" range :

         s = plothsizes();
         plotinit(0, s[1]-1, s[2]-1);
         plotscale(0, 0,1000, 0,1000);

   plotkill"(w)"
       erase rectwindow "w" and free the corresponding memory. Note that if you want to use the
       rectwindow "w" again, you have to use "initrect" first to specify the new size. So it's
       better in this case to use "initrect" directly as this throws away any previous work in
       the given rectwindow.

   plotlines"(w,X,Y,{flag = 0})"
       draw on the rectwindow "w" the polygon such that the (x,y)-coordinates of the vertices are
       in the vectors of equal length "X" and "Y". For simplicity, the whole polygon is drawn,
       not only the part of the polygon which is inside the rectwindow. If "flag" is non-zero,
       close the polygon. In any case, the virtual cursor does not move.

       "X" and "Y" are allowed to be scalars (in this case, both have to).  There, a single
       segment will be drawn, between the virtual cursor current position and the point "(X,Y)".
       And only the part thereof which actually lies within the boundary of "w". Then move the
       virtual cursor to "(X,Y)", even if it is outside the window. If you want to draw a line
       from "(x1,y1)" to "(x2,y2)" where "(x1,y1)" is not necessarily the position of the virtual
       cursor, use "plotmove(w,x1,y1)" before using this function.

   plotlinetype"(w,type)"
       change the type of lines subsequently plotted in rectwindow "w". type "-2" corresponds to
       frames, "-1" to axes, larger values may correspond to something else. "w = -1" changes
       highlevel plotting. This is only taken into account by the "gnuplot" interface.

   plotmove"(w,x,y)"
       move the virtual cursor of the rectwindow "w" to position "(x,y)".

   plotpoints"(w,X,Y)"
       draw on the rectwindow "w" the points whose "(x,y)"-coordinates are in the vectors of
       equal length "X" and "Y" and which are inside "w". The virtual cursor does not move. This
       is basically the same function as "plothraw", but either with no scaling factor or with a
       scale chosen using the function "plotscale".

       As was the case with the "plotlines" function, "X" and "Y" are allowed to be
       (simultaneously) scalar. In this case, draw the single point "(X,Y)" on the rectwindow "w"
       (if it is actually inside "w"), and in any case move the virtual cursor to position
       "(x,y)".

   plotpointsize"(w,size)"
       changes the ``size'' of following points in rectwindow "w". If "w = -1", change it in all
       rectwindows.  This only works in the "gnuplot" interface.

   plotpointtype"(w,type)"
       change the type of points subsequently plotted in rectwindow "w". "type = -1" corresponds
       to a dot, larger values may correspond to something else. "w = -1" changes highlevel
       plotting. This is only taken into account by the "gnuplot" interface.

   plotrbox"(w,dx,dy)"
       draw in the rectwindow "w" the outline of the rectangle which is such that the points
       "(x1,y1)" and "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" are opposite corners, where "(x1,y1)" is the current
       position of the cursor.  Only the part of the rectangle which is in "w" is drawn. The
       virtual cursor does not move.

   plotrecth"(w,X = a,b,expr,{flag = 0},{n = 0})"
       writes to rectwindow "w" the curve output of "ploth""(w,X = a,b,expr,flag,n)".

   plotrecthraw"(w,data,{flag = 0})"
       plot graph(s) for data in rectwindow "w". "flag" has the same significance here as in
       "ploth", though recursive plot is no more significant.

       data is a vector of vectors, each corresponding to a list a coordinates.  If parametric
       plot is set, there must be an even number of vectors, each successive pair corresponding
       to a curve. Otherwise, the first one containe the "x" coordinates, and the other ones
       contain the "y"-coordinates of curves to plot.

   plotrline"(w,dx,dy)"
       draw in the rectwindow "w" the part of the segment "(x1,y1)-(x1+dx,y1+dy)" which is inside
       "w", where "(x1,y1)" is the current position of the virtual cursor, and move the virtual
       cursor to "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" (even if it is outside the window).

   plotrmove"(w,dx,dy)"
       move the virtual cursor of the rectwindow "w" to position "(x1+dx,y1+dy)", where "(x1,y1)"
       is the initial position of the cursor (i.e. to position "(dx,dy)" relative to the initial
       cursor).

   plotrpoint"(w,dx,dy)"
       draw the point "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" on the rectwindow "w" (if it is inside "w"), where
       "(x1,y1)" is the current position of the cursor, and in any case move the virtual cursor
       to position "(x1+dx,y1+dy)".

   plotscale"(w,x1,x2,y1,y2)"
       scale the local coordinates of the rectwindow "w" so that "x" goes from "x1" to "x2" and
       "y" goes from "y1" to "y2" ("x2 < x1" and "y2 < y1" being allowed). Initially, after the
       initialization of the rectwindow "w" using the function "plotinit", the default scaling is
       the graphic pixel count, and in particular the "y" axis is oriented downwards since the
       origin is at the upper left. The function "plotscale" allows to change all these defaults
       and should be used whenever functions are graphed.

   plotstring"(w,x,{flag = 0})"
       draw on the rectwindow "w" the String "x" (see "Label se:strings"), at the current
       position of the cursor.

       flag is used for justification: bits 1 and 2 regulate horizontal alignment: left if 0,
       right if 2, center if 1. Bits 4 and 8 regulate vertical alignment: bottom if 0, top if 8,
       v-center if 4. Can insert additional small gap between point and string: horizontal if bit
       16 is set, vertical if bit 32 is set (see the tutorial for an example).

   plotterm"(term)"
       sets terminal where high resolution plots go (this is currently only taken into account by
       the "gnuplot" graphical driver). Using the "gnuplot" driver, possible terminals are the
       same as in gnuplot. If term is "?", lists possible values.

       Terminal options can be appended to the terminal name and space; terminal size can be put
       immediately after the name, as in "gif = 300,200".  Positive return value means success.

   psdraw"(list)"
       same as "plotdraw", except that the output is a PostScript program appended to the
       "psfile".

   psploth"(X = a,b,expr)"
       same as "ploth", except that the output is a PostScript program appended to the "psfile".

   psplothraw"(listx,listy)"
       same as "plothraw", except that the output is a PostScript program appended to the
       "psfile".

Programming under GP
       =head2 Control statements.

       A number of control statements are available under GP. They are simpler and have a syntax
       slightly different from their C counterparts, but are quite powerful enough to write any
       kind of program. Some of them are specific to GP, since they are made for number
       theorists. As usual, "X" will denote any simple variable name, and seq will always denote
       a sequence of expressions, including the empty sequence.

       break"({n = 1})"
           interrupts execution of current seq, and immediately exits from the "n" innermost
           enclosing loops, within the current function call (or the top level loop). "n" must be
           bigger than 1.  If "n" is greater than the number of enclosing loops, all enclosing
           loops are exited.

       for"(X = a,b,seq)"
           the formal variable "X" going from "a" to "b", the seq is evaluated. Nothing is done
           if "a > b".  "a" and "b" must be in R.

       fordiv"(n,X,seq)"
           the formal variable "X" ranging through the positive divisors of "n", the sequence seq
           is evaluated.  "n" must be of type integer.

       forprime"(X = a,b,seq)"
           the formal variable "X" ranging over the prime numbers between "a" to "b" (including
           "a" and "b" if they are prime), the seq is evaluated. More precisely, the value of "X"
           is incremented to the smallest prime strictly larger than "X" at the end of each
           iteration. Nothing is done if "a > b". Note that "a" and "b" must be in R.

             ? { forprime(p = 2, 12,
                   print(p);
                   if (p == 3, p = 6);
                 )
               }
             2
             3
             7
             11

       forstep"(X = a,b,s,seq)"
           the formal variable "X" going from "a" to "b", in increments of "s", the seq is
           evaluated.  Nothing is done if "s > 0" and "a > b" or if "s < 0" and "a < b". "s" must
           be in "R^*" or a vector of steps "[s_1,...,s_n]". In the latter case, the successive
           steps are used in the order they appear in "s".

             ? forstep(x=5, 20, [2,4], print(x))
             5
             7
             11
             13
             17
             19

       forsubgroup"(H = G,{B},seq)"
           executes seq for each subgroup "H" of the abelian group "G" (given in SNF form or as a
           vector of elementary divisors), whose index is bounded by bound. The subgroups are not
           ordered in any obvious way, unless "G" is a "p"-group in which case Birkhoff's
           algorithm produces them by decreasing index. A subgroup is given as a matrix whose
           columns give its generators on the implicit generators of "G". For example, the
           following prints all subgroups of index less than 2 in "G = Z/2Z g_1  x Z/2Z g_2" :

             ? G = [2,2]; forsubgroup(H=G, 2, print(H))
             [1; 1]
             [1; 2]
             [2; 1]
             [1, 0; 1, 1]

           The last one, for instance is generated by "(g_1, g_1 + g_2)". This routine is
           intended to treat huge groups, when subgrouplist is not an option due to the sheer
           size of the output.

           For maximal speed the subgroups have been left as produced by the algorithm.  To print
           them in canonical form (as left divisors of "G" in HNF form), one can for instance use

             ? G = matdiagonal([2,2]); forsubgroup(H=G, 2, print(mathnf(concat(G,H))))
             [2, 1; 0, 1]
             [1, 0; 0, 2]
             [2, 0; 0, 1]
             [1, 0; 0, 1]

           Note that in this last representation, the index "[G:H]" is given by the determinant.

       forvec"(X = v,seq,{flag = 0})"
           "v" being an "n"-component vector (where "n" is arbitrary) of two-component vectors
           "[a_i,b_i]" for "1 <= i <= n", the seq is evaluated with the formal variable "X[1]"
           going from "a_1" to "b_1",...,"X[n]" going from "a_n" to "b_n".  The formal variable
           with the highest index moves the fastest. If "flag = 1", generate only nondecreasing
           vectors "X", and if "flag = 2", generate only strictly increasing vectors "X".

       if"(a,{seq1},{seq2})"
           if "a" is non-zero, the expression sequence seq1 is evaluated, otherwise the
           expression seq2 is evaluated. Of course, seq1 or seq2 may be empty, so "if (a,seq)"
           evaluates seq if "a" is not equal to zero (you don't have to write the second comma),
           and does nothing otherwise, whereas "if (a,,seq)" evaluates seq if "a" is equal to
           zero, and does nothing otherwise. You could get the same result using the "!" ("not")
           operator: "if (!a,seq)".

           Note that the boolean operators "&&" and "||" are evaluated according to operator
           precedence as explained in "Label se:operators", but that, contrary to other
           operators, the evaluation of the arguments is stopped as soon as the final truth value
           has been determined. For instance

             if (reallydoit && longcomplicatedfunction(), ...)%

           is a perfectly safe statement.

           Recall that functions such as "break" and "next" operate on loops (such as "forxxx",
           "while", "until"). The "if" statement is not a loop (obviously!).

       next"({n = 1})"
           interrupts execution of current "seq", resume the next iteration of the innermost
           enclosing loop, within the current fonction call (or top level loop). If "n" is
           specified, resume at the "n"-th enclosing loop. If "n" is bigger than the number of
           enclosing loops, all enclosing loops are exited.

       return"({x = 0})"
           returns from current subroutine, with result "x".

       until"(a,seq)"
           evaluates expression sequence seq until "a" is not equal to 0 (i.e. until "a" is
           true). If "a" is initially not equal to 0, seq is evaluated once (more generally, the
           condition on "a" is tested after execution of the seq, not before as in "while").

       while"(a,seq)"
           while "a" is non-zero evaluate the expression sequence seq. The test is made before
           evaluating the "seq", hence in particular if "a" is initially equal to zero the seq
           will not be evaluated at all.

   Specific functions used in GP programming
       In addition to the general PARI functions, it is necessary to have some functions which
       will be of use specifically for GP, though a few of these can be accessed under library
       mode. Before we start describing these, we recall the difference between strings and
       keywords (see "Label se:strings"): the latter don't get expanded at all, and you can type
       them without any enclosing quotes. The former are dynamic objects, where everything
       outside quotes gets immediately expanded.

       We need an additional notation for this chapter. An argument between braces, followed by a
       star, like "{str}*", means that any number of such arguments (possibly none) can be given.

       addhelp"(S,str)"
            changes the help message for the symbol "S". The string str is expanded on the spot
           and stored as the online help for "S". If "S" is a function you have defined, its
           definition will still be printed before the message str.  It is recommended that you
           document global variables and user functions in this way. Of course GP won't protest
           if you don't do it.

           There's nothing to prevent you from modifying the help of built-in PARI functions (but
           if you do, we'd like to hear why you needed to do it!).

       alias"(newkey,key)"
           defines the keyword newkey as an alias for keyword key. key must correspond to an
           existing function name. This is different from the general user macros in that alias
           expansion takes place immediately upon execution, without having to look up any
           function code, and is thus much faster. A sample alias file "misc/gpalias" is provided
           with the standard distribution. Alias commands are meant to be read upon startup from
           the ".gprc" file, to cope with function names you are dissatisfied with, and should be
           useless in interactive usage.

       allocatemem"({x = 0})"
           this is a very special operation which allows the user to change the stack size after
           initialization. "x" must be a non-negative integer. If "x! = 0", a new stack of size
           "16*\lceil x/16\rceil" bytes will be allocated, all the PARI data on the old stack
           will be moved to the new one, and the old stack will be discarded. If "x = 0", the
           size of the new stack will be twice the size of the old one.

           Although it is a function, this must be the last instruction in any GP sequence. The
           technical reason is that this routine usually moves the stack, so objects from the
           current sequence might not be correct anymore. Hence, to prevent such problems, this
           routine terminates by a "longjmp" (just as an error would) and not by a return.

           The library syntax is allocatemoremem"(x)", where "x" is an unsigned long, and the
           return type is void. GP uses a variant which ends by a "longjmp".

       default"({key},{val},{flag})"
           sets the default corresponding to keyword key to value val. val is a string (which of
           course accepts numeric arguments without adverse effects, due to the expansion
           mechanism). See "Label se:defaults" for a list of available defaults, and "Label
           se:meta" for some shortcut alternatives. Typing "default()" (or "\d") yields the
           complete default list as well as their current values.

           If val is omitted, prints the current value of default key.  If "flag" is set, returns
           the result instead of printing it.

       error"({str}*)"
           outputs its argument list (each of them interpreted as a string), then interrupts the
           running GP program, returning to the input prompt.

           Example: "error("n = ", n, " is not squarefree !")".

           Note that, due to the automatic concatenation of strings, you could in fact use only
           one argument, just by suppressing the commas.

       extern"(str)"
           the string str is the name of an external command (i.e. one you would type from your
           UNIX shell prompt).  This command is immediately run and its input fed into GP, just
           as if read from a file.

       getheap"()"
           returns a two-component row vector giving the number of objects on the heap and the
           amount of memory they occupy in long words. Useful mainly for debugging purposes.

           The library syntax is getheap"()".

       getrand"()"
           returns the current value of the random number seed. Useful mainly for debugging
           purposes.

           The library syntax is getrand"()", returns a C long.

       getstack"()"
           returns the current value of "top-avma", i.e. the number of bytes used up to now on
           the stack. Should be equal to 0 in between commands. Useful mainly for debugging
           purposes.

           The library syntax is getstack"()", returns a C long.

       gettime"()"
           returns the time (in milliseconds) elapsed since either the last call to "gettime", or
           to the beginning of the containing GP instruction (if inside GP), whichever came last.

           The library syntax is gettime"()", returns a C long.

       global"({list of variables})"

           declares the corresponding variables to be global. From now on, you will be forbidden
           to use them as formal parameters for function definitions or as loop indexes. This is
           especially useful when patching together various scripts, possibly written with
           different naming conventions. For instance the following situation is dangerous:

             p = 3   \\ fix characteristic
             ...
             forprime(p = 2, N, ...)
             f(p) = ...

           since within the loop or within the function's body (even worse: in the subroutines
           called in that scope), the true global value of "p" will be hidden. If the statement
           "global(p = 3)" appears at the beginning of the script, then both expressions will
           trigger syntax errors.

           Calling "global" without arguments prints the list of global variables in use. In
           particular, "eval(global)" will output the values of all local variables.

       input"()"
           reads a string, interpreted as a GP expression, from the input file, usually standard
           input (i.e. the keyboard). If a sequence of expressions is given, the result is the
           result of the last expression of the sequence. When using this instruction, it is
           useful to prompt for the string by using the "print1" function. Note that in the
           present version 2.19 of "pari.el", when using GP under GNU Emacs (see "Label
           se:emacs") one must prompt for the string, with a string which ends with the same
           prompt as any of the previous ones (a "? " will do for instance).

       install"(name,code,{gpname},{lib})"
           loads from dynamic library lib the function name. Assigns to it the name gpname in
           this GP session, with argument code code (see "Label se:gp.interface" for an
           explanation of those). If lib is omitted, uses "libpari.so". If gpname is omitted,
           uses name.

           This function is useful for adding custom functions to the GP interpreter, or picking
           useful functions from unrelated libraries. For instance, it makes the function
           "system" obsolete:

             ? install(system, vs, sys, "libc.so")
             ? sys("ls gp*")
             gp.c            gp.h            gp_rl.c

           But it also gives you access to all (non static) functions defined in the PARI
           library. For instance, the function "GEN addii(GEN x, GEN y)" adds two PARI integers,
           and is not directly accessible under GP (it's eventually called by the "+" operator of
           course):

             ? install("addii", "GG")
             ? addii(1, 2)
             %1 = 3

           Caution: This function may not work on all systems, especially when GP has been
           compiled statically. In that case, the first use of an installed function will provoke
           a Segmentation Fault, i.e. a major internal blunder (this should never happen with a
           dynamically linked executable).  Hence, if you intend to use this function, please
           check first on some harmless example such as the ones above that it works properly on
           your machine.

       kill"(s)"
            kills the present value of the variable, alias or user-defined function "s". The
           corresponding identifier can now be used to name any GP object (variable or function).
           This is the only way to replace a variable by a function having the same name (or the
           other way round), as in the following example:

             ? f = 1
             %1 = 1
             ? f(x) = 0
               ***   unused characters: f(x)=0
                                         ^----
             ? kill(f)
             ? f(x) = 0
             ? f()
             %2 = 0

           When you kill a variable, all objects that used it become invalid. You can still
           display them, even though the killed variable will be printed in a funny way
           (following the same convention as used by the library function "fetch_var", see "Label
           se:vars"). For example:

             ? a^2 + 1
             %1 = a^2 + 1
             ? kill(a)
             ? %1
             %2 = #<1>^2 + 1

           If you simply want to restore a variable to its ``undefined'' value (monomial of
           degree one), use the quote operator: "a = 'a".  Predefined symbols ("x" and GP
           function names) cannot be killed.

       print"({str}*)"
           outputs its (string) arguments in raw format, ending with a newline.

       print1"({str}*)"
           outputs its (string) arguments in raw format, without ending with a newline (note that
           you can still embed newlines within your strings, using the "\n" notation !).

       printp"({str}*)"
           outputs its (string) arguments in prettyprint (beautified) format, ending with a
           newline.

       printp1"({str}*)"
           outputs its (string) arguments in prettyprint (beautified) format, without ending with
           a newline.

       printtex"({str}*)"
           outputs its (string) arguments in TeX format. This output can then be used in a TeX
           manuscript.  The printing is done on the standard output. If you want to print it to a
           file you should use "writetex" (see there).

           Another possibility is to enable the "log" default (see "Label se:defaults").  You
           could for instance do:

             default(logfile, "new.tex");
             default(log, 1);
             printtex(result);

           (You can use the automatic string expansion/concatenation process to have dynamic file
           names if you wish).

       quit"()"
           exits GP.

       read"({str})"
           reads in the file whose name results from the expansion of the string str. If str is
           omitted, re-reads the last file that was fed into GP. The return value is the result
           of the last expression evaluated.

       reorder"({x = []})"
           "x" must be a vector. If "x" is the empty vector, this gives the vector whose
           components are the existing variables in increasing order (i.e. in decreasing
           importance). Killed variables (see "kill") will be shown as 0. If "x" is non-empty, it
           must be a permutation of variable names, and this permutation gives a new order of
           importance of the variables, for output only. For example, if the existing order is
           "[x,y,z]", then after "reorder([z,x])" the order of importance of the variables, with
           respect to output, will be "[z,y,x]". The internal representation is unaffected.

       setrand"(n)"
           reseeds the random number generator to the value "n". The initial seed is "n = 1".

           The library syntax is setrand"(n)", where "n" is a "long". Returns "n".

       system"(str)"
           str is a string representing a system command. This command is executed, its output
           written to the standard output (this won't get into your logfile), and control returns
           to the PARI system. This simply calls the C "system" command.

       trap"({e}, {rec}, {seq})"
           tries to execute seq, trapping error "e", that is effectively preventing it from
           aborting computations in the usual way; the recovery sequence rec is executed if the
           error occurs and the evaluation of rec becomes the result of the command. If "e" is
           omitted, all exceptions are trapped. Note in particular that hitting "^C" (Control-C)
           raises an exception.

             ? \\ trap division by 0
             ? inv(x) = trap (gdiver2, INFINITY, 1/x)
             ? inv(2)
             %1 = 1/2
             ? inv(0)
             %2 = INFINITY

           If seq is omitted, defines rec as a default action when encountering exception "e".
           The error message is printed, as well as the result of the evaluation of rec, and the
           control is given back to the GP prompt. In particular, current computation is then
           lost.

           The following error handler prints the list of all user variables, then stores in a
           file their name and their values:

             ? { trap( ,
                   print(reorder);
                   write("crash", reorder);
                   write("crash", eval(reorder))) }

           If no recovery code is given (rec is omitted) a so-called break loop will be started.
           During a break loop, all commands are read and evaluated as during the main GP loop
           (except that no history of results is kept).

           To get out of the break loop, you can use "next", "break" or "return"; reading in a
           file by "\r" will also terminate the loop once the file has been read ("read" will
           remain in the break loop). If the error is not fatal ("^C" is the only non-fatal
           error), "next" will continue the computation as if nothing had happened (except of
           course, you may have changed GP state during the break loop); otherwise control will
           come back to the GP prompt. After a user interrupt ("^C"), entering an empty input
           line (i.e hitting the return key) has the same effect as "next".

           Break loops are useful as a debugging tool to inspect the values of GP variables to
           understand why a problem occurred, or to change GP behaviour (increase debugging
           level, start storing results in a logfile, modify parameters...) in the middle of a
           long computation (hit "^C", type in your modifications, then type "next").

           If rec is the empty string "" the last default handler is popped out, and replaced by
           the previous one for that error.

           Note: The interface is currently not adequate for trapping individual exceptions. In
           the current version 2.2.0, the following keywords are recognized, but the name list
           will be expanded and changed in the future (all library mode errors can be trapped:
           it's a matter of defining the keywords to GP, and there are currently far too many
           useless ones):

           "accurer": accuracy problem

           "gdiver2": division by 0

           "archer": not available on this architecture or operating system

           "typeer": wrong type

           "errpile": the PARI stack overflows

       type"(x,{t})"
           this is useful only under GP. If "t" is not present, returns the internal type number
           of the PARI object "x".  Otherwise, makes a copy of "x" and sets its type equal to
           type "t", which can be either a number or, preferably since internal codes may
           eventually change, a symbolic name such as "t_FRACN" (you can skip the "t_" part here,
           so that "FRACN" by itself would also be all right). Check out existing type names with
           the metacommand "\t".

           GP won't let you create meaningless objects in this way where the internal structure
           doesn't match the type. This function can be useful to create reducible rationals
           (type "t_FRACN") or rational functions (type "t_RFRACN"). In fact it's the only way to
           do so in GP. In this case, the created object, as well as the objects created from it,
           will not be reduced automatically, making some operations a bit faster.

           There is no equivalent library syntax, since the internal functions "typ" and "settyp"
           are available. Note that "settyp" does not create a copy of "x", contrary to most PARI
           functions. It also doesn't check for consistency. "settyp" just changes the type in
           place and returns nothing. "typ" returns a C long integer. Note also the different
           spellings of the internal functions ("set")"typ" and of the GP function "type", which
           is due to the fact that "type" is a reserved identifier for some C compilers.

       whatnow"(key)"
           if keyword key is the name of a function that was present in GP version 1.39.15 or
           lower, outputs the new function name and syntax, if it changed at all (387 out of 560
           did).

       write"(filename,{str*})"
           writes (appends) to filename the remaining arguments, and appends a newline (same
           output as "print").

       write1"(filename,{str*})"
           writes (appends) to filename the remaining arguments without a trailing newline (same
           output as "print1").

       writetex"(filename,{str*})"
           as "write", in TeX format.

POD ERRORS
       Hey! The above document had some coding errors, which are explained below:

       Around line 7476:
           '=item' outside of any '=over'

       Around line 7628:
           You forgot a '=back' before '=head2'

       Around line 7643:
           '=item' outside of any '=over'



perl v5.10.0                                2011-06-20                               libPARI(3pm)

Generated by $Id: phpMan.php,v 4.49 2006/02/26 13:18:18 chedong Exp $ Author: Che Dong
On Apache
Under GNU General Public License
2012-05-24 18:45 @38.107.179.239 Crawled by CCBot/1.0 (+http://www.commoncrawl.org/bot.html)
Valid XHTML 1.0!Valid CSS!